AV-29LS

136
SERVICE MANUAL AV-29LS AV-29LX AV-29LH AV-2908TEE COLOUR TELEVISION BASIC CHASSIS CH No. 51839 June 2001 COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD. AV-29LS AV-29LX AV-29LS(-AU) AV-29LX(-A) AV-29LH AV-29LX(-AU) AV-2908TEE TEXT DISPLAY MENU POWER CHANNEL VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 -/-- DISPLAY MENU POWER CHANNEL VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 -/-- DISPLAY MENU POWER CHANNEL VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 -/-- TEXT DISPLAY MENU POWER CHANNEL VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 -/-- RM-C352-1C [AV-29LS] [AV-29LS(-AU)] RM-C353-1C [AV-29LH] RM-C355-1C [AV-2908TEE] RM-C357-1C [AV-29LX] [AV-29LX(-A)] [AV-29LX(-AU)] CONTENTS a SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................................... 2 a SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 3 a FEATURES .............................................................................................................................................. 4 a FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 5 a SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................................................... 6 ¤ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (APPENDED) ..................................................................................... 1-1 a SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................................................... 14 ¤ STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (APPENDIX) .................................................................................. 2-1 a PARTS LIST ........................................................................................................................................... 37

Transcript of AV-29LS

Page 1: AV-29LS

SERVICE MANUAL

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

COLOUR TELEVISION

BASIC CHASSIS

CH

No. 51839June 2001

COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LS(-AU) AV-29LX(-A)

AV-29LH AV-29LX(-AU)

AV-2908TEE

RM-C352 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

I/II

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C357 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C353 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

I/II

RM-C355 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C352-1C[AV-29LS][AV-29LS(-AU)]

RM-C353-1C[AV-29LH]

RM-C355-1C[AV-2908TEE]

RM-C357-1C[AV-29LX][AV-29LX(-A)][AV-29LX(-AU)]

CONTENTSa SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................2a SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................3a FEATURES ..............................................................................................................................................4a FUNCTIONS.............................................................................................................................................5a SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................6¤ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (APPENDED) ..................................................................................... 1-1a SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................................................................14¤ STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (APPENDIX) .................................................................................. 2-1a PARTS LIST ...........................................................................................................................................37

Page 2: AV-29LS

2 No. 51839

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

Dimensions (W × H × D) 73.2cm × 58.8cm × 51.8cm

Mass 47kg

TV RF System B, G, I, D, H, K1, M

Colour System TV Mode PAL / SECAM / NTSC3.58 / NTSC4.43

VIDEO Mode PAL / SECAM / NTSC3.58 / NTSC4.43

Stereo System A2/NICAM (B / G, I, D / K) System Playback Only

Teletext system

FLOF(Fastext), Q — Q

WST(World Standard Text)

Receiving Frequency VHF (VL) 46.25MHz – 140.25MHz (AU0 – S6)

VHF (VH) 147.25MHz – 423.25MHz (S7 – S36)

UHF 431.25MHz – 863.25MHz (S37 – CHINA 57)

CATV Cable TVs of Mid (X-Z, S1-S10)

Super (S11-S20) & Hyper (S21-S41) bands receivable

Intermediate VIF Carrier 38.0MHz

Frequency 31.5MHz (6.5MHz)

SIF Carrier 32.0MHz (6.0MHz)

32.5MHz (5.5MHz)

33.5MHz (4.5MHz)

Colour Sub Carrier Frequency PAL (4.43MHz), SECAM (4.40625MHz / 4.25MHz)

NTSC (3.58MHz / 4.43MHz)

Aerial Input Terminal 75Ø Unbalanced

Power Input AC110 – 240V, 50 / 60Hz

Power Consumption 172W (Max.) / 108W (Avg.) 172W (Max.) / 108W (Avg.)

Picture Tube Visible size : 68cm measured diagonally

High Voltage 32kV +1/-1.5kV (at cut-off in service mode)

Speaker 5 × 12cm Oval type ×2

Audio Output 7W ×2

Video / Audio Input (1 / 2 / 3) Video(1,3) : 1Vp-p, 75Ø (RCA pin jack)

Audio(1,2,3) : 500mVrms ( -4dBs ), High Impedance (RCA pin jack)

S-Video ( Input 1 Over ) [Only for AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]

Y : 1Vp-p Positive (negative sync provided, when terminated with 75Ø)

C : 0.286Vp-p (burst signal, when terminated with 75Ø)

Component Input ( Input 2 )

Y : 1Vp-p positive (negative sync provided, when terminated with 75Ø)

CB/CR : 0.7Vp-p 75Ø

Video/Audio Output 1Vp-p, 75Ø (RCA pin jack)

500mVrms(-4dBs)

Low impedance (400Hz when modulated 100%) (RCA pin jack)

Remote Control Unit RM-C352-1C RM-C353-1C RM-C357-1C RM-C355-1C

(Battery size: AA/R06/UM-3 × 2)

SPECIFICATIONSItems

Design & specifications are subject to change without notice.

Contents

AV-29LS AV-29LS-AU AV-29LH AV-29LX AV-29LX-A AV-29LX-AU AV-2908TEE

130W,1.1A(at 220V)

Page 3: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS1. The design of this product contains special hardware, many circuits

and components specially for safety purposes. For continued pro-tection, no changes should be made to the original design unlessauthorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts mustbe identical to those used in the original circuits. Service should beperformed by qualified personnel only.

2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the products should not bemade. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufactur-er's warranty and will further relieve the manufacturer of responsi-bility for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom.

3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have specialsafety-related characteristics. These characteristics are often notevident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded bythem necessarily be obtained by using replacement componentsrated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which havethese special safety characteristics are identified in the parts list ofService manual. Electrical components having such features areidentified by shading on the schematics and by (!) on the partslist in Service manual. The use of a substitute replacement whichdoes not have the same safety characteristics as the recommendedreplacement part shown in the parts list of Service manual maycause shock, fire, or other hazards.

4. Don't short between the LIVE side ground and ISOLATED (NEU-TRAL) side ground or EARTH side ground when repairing.Some model's power circuit is partly different in the GND. The differ-ence of the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND, the ISO-LATED (NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND and EARTH : ( ) side GND.Don't short between the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED (NEUTRAL)side GND or EARTH side GND and never measure with a measur-ing apparatus (oscilloscope etc.) the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND or EARTH side GND at the same time.If above note will not be kept, a fuse or any parts will be broken.

5. If any repair has been made to the chassis, it is recommended thatthe B1 setting should be checked or adjusted (See ADJUSTMENTOF B1 POWER SUPPLY).

6. The high voltage applied to the picture tube must conform with thatspecified in Service manual. Excessive high voltage can cause anincrease in X-Ray emission, arcing and possible component dam-age, therefore operation under excessive high voltage conditionsshould be kept to a minimum, or should be prevented. If severearcing occurs, remove the AC power immediately and determinethe cause by visual inspection (incorrect installation, cracked ormelted high voltage harness, poor soldering, etc.). To maintain theproper minimum level of soft X-Ray emission, components in thehigh voltage circuitry including the picture tube must be the exactreplacements or alternatives approved by the manufacturer of thecomplete product.

7. Do not check high voltage by drawing an arc. Use a high voltagemeter or a high voltage probe with a VTVM. Discharge the picturetube before attempting meter connection, by connecting a clip leadto the ground frame and connecting the other end of the lead througha 10kØ 2W resistor to the anode button.

8. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extraprecaution should be given to assure correct lead dress in the highvoltage circuit area. Where a short circuit has occurred, those com-ponents that indicate evidence of overheating should be replaced.Always use the manufacturer's replacement components.

9. Isolation Check(Safety for Electrical Shock Hazard)After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation checkon the exposed metal parts of the cabinet (antenna terminals, video/audio input and output terminals, Control knobs, metal cabinet, screwheads, earphone jack, control shafts, etc.) to be sure the product issafe to operate without danger of electrical shock.

(1) Dielectric Strength TestThe isolation between the AC primary circuit and all metal partsexposed to the user, particularly any exposed metal part having areturn path to the chassis should withstand a voltage of 3000V AC(r.m.s.) for a period of one second.(. . . . Withstand a voltage of 1100V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance ratedup to 120V, and 3000V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance rated 200V ormore, for a period of one second.)This method of test requires a test equipment not generally found inthe service trade.

(2) Leakage Current CheckPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Using a "Leakage CurrentTester", measure the leakage current from each exposed metal partof the cabinet, particularly any exposed metal part having a returnpath to the chassis, to a known good earth ground (water pipe, etc.).Any leakage current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.). Alternate Check MethodPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Use an AC voltmeter hav-ing 1000 ohms per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner.Connect a 1500Ø 10W resistor paralleled by a 0.15µF AC-type ca-pacitor between an exposed metal part and a known good earthground (water pipe, etc.). Measure the AC voltage across the resis-tor with the AC voltmeter. Move the resistor connection to each ex-posed metal part, particularly any exposed metal part having a re-turn path to the chassis, and measure the AC voltage across theresistor. Now, reverse the plug in the AC outlet and repeat eachmeasurement. Any voltage measured must not exceed 0.75V AC(r.m.s.). This corresponds to 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.3V AC (r.m.s.).This corresponds to 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).

AC VOLTMETER(HAVING 1000Ω/V,OR MORE SENSITIVITY)

PLACE THIS PROBEON EACH EXPOSEDMETAL PART1500Ω 10W

0.15µF AC-TYPE

GOOD EARTH GROUND

Page 4: AV-29LS

4 No. 51839

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

FEATURESs The TELETEXT SYSTEM has a built-in FASTEXT/WST

System. [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-2908TEE]s New chassis design enables use of an interactive on-screen control.s Pure flat CRT produces fine textured picture in every detail.s Wide range voltage (110V ~ 240V) for AC power input.s With AUDIO/VIDEO/S-VIDEO/COMPONENT input terminals.

(S-VIDEO : AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU)s I 2 C bus control utilizes single chip ICs.

s By means of AUTO PROGRAM, the TV stations can be selected au-tomatically and the TV channels can also be rearranged automati-cally.

s Built-in DIGITAL ECO MODE (ECONOMY, ECOLOGY)In accordance with the brightness in a room, the brightness and/orcontrast of the picture can be adjusted automatically to make the op-timum picture which is easy on the eye.

s Built-in ON TIMER & RETURN +.

MAIN DIFFERENCE LIST[AV-29LS & AV-29LS-AU & AV-29LH]

[AV-29LX & AV-29LX-A & AV-29LX-AU & AV-2908TEE]

!MODEL No.

AV-29LX AV-29LX-A AV-29LX-AU AV-2908TEEPart Name

! POWER CORD QMP40D0-200J5 QMPR010-200-E2 QMP2980-185J5 QMP40D0-200J5

or QMP40D0-200J3 or QMPR010-200-K2 or QMP40D0-200J3

! RATING LABEL LC20377-010B LC20413-002B-H LC20377-013B-H LC20377-009B-H

FRONT CABINET LC11193-003A-H LC11193-004A-H

REAR COVER LC10763-004A-HH LC10763-008A-H LC10763-004A-HH

MAIN PWB ASS’Y SCH-1002A-H2 SCH-1018A-H2 SCH-1017A-H2

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-C357-1C RM-C355-1C

! INST BOOK LCT0935-001A-H LCT1007-001A-H

WARRANTY CARD — — BT-56001-2 BT-54012-2

SERVICE CENTER LIST — — BT-56002-2 —

CONVERSION PLUG — QAM0055-001 — —

!MODEL No.

AV-29LS AV-29LS-AU AV-29LHPart Name

! POWER CORD QMP40D0-200J5 QMP2980-185J5 QMPN050-200-E2

or QMP40D0-200J3

! RATING LABEL LC20377-001B-H LC20377-013B-H LC20377-012B-H

FRONT CABINET LC11193-001A-H LC11193-002A-H

REAR COVER LC10763-004A-HH LC10763-008A-H

MAIN PWB ASS’Y SCH-1001A-H2 SCH-1016A-H2 SCH-1015A-H2

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-C352-1C RM-C353-1C

! INST BOOK LCT0935-001A-H LCT1006-001A-H

WARRANTY CARD — BT-56001-2 —

SERVICE CENTER LIST — BT-56002-2 —

Page 5: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 5

FUNCTIONS

a REAR PANEL

[AV-29LS, AV-29LH, AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-2908TEE] [AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]

a FRONT PANEL

a REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

RM-C352-1C[AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU]

RM-C353-1C[AV-29LH]

RM-C357-1C[AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]

L/MONOV R

IN (VIDEO-3)

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

S

OVER

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

R RRCR

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

R R RCR

RM-C352 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

I/II

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C357 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C353 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

I/II

RM-C355 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C355-1C[AV-2908TEE]

Page 6: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

6 No. 51839

DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

REMOVING THE REAR COVER1. Unplug the power supply cord.2. Remove the 16 screws marked Å as shown in Fig.1.3. Withdraw the REAR COVER toward you.

[CAUTION]

• When reinstalling the rear cover, carefully push it inward after in-serting the MAIN PWB into the rear cover groove.

REMOVING THE CHASSIS (CHASSIS BASE ANDCONTROL BASE)

• After removing the rear cover.1. Slightly raise the both sides of the chassis by hand and remove the

2 claws marked ı under the chassis from the front cabinet as shownin Fig.1.

2. Withdraw the chassis backward.

(If necessary, take off the wire clamp, connector’s etc.)

*When conducting a check with power supplied, be sure to confirmthat the CRT earth wire is connected to the CRT SOCKET PWBand the MAIN PWB.

REMOVING THE AV TERMINAL BOARD

• After removing the rear cover.1. Remove the 4 screws marked Ç as shown in Fig.1.2. When you pull out the AV TERMINAL BOARD in the direction of

arrow marked Î as shown in Fig.1, it can be removed.

REMOVING THE CONTROL BASE

• After removing the rear cover and the chassis.1. While pushing down the 2 claws maked ´ as shown in Fig. 2.2. When you pull out the CONTROL BASE in the direction of arrow

maked Ï as shown in Fig, 2.(If necessary, take off the wire, connector’s etc.)

REMOVING THE SPEAKER• After removing the rear cover.1. Remove the 4 screws marked ˝ as shown in Fig.1.2. Withdraw the speaker backward.3. Follow the same steps when removing the other hand speaker.

SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

CHECKING THE MAIN PW BOARD1. To check the back side of the MAIN PW Board.

1) Pull out the chassis. (Refer to REMOVING THE CHASSIS).2) Erect the chassis vertically so that you can easily check the back

side of the MAIN PW Board.

[CAUTION]

• When erecting the chassis, be careful so that there will be no con-tacting with other PW Board.

• Before turning on power, make sure that the CRT earth wire andother connectors are properly connected.

• When repairing, connect the Deg. coil to the DEG. connector on theMain PW Board.

WIRE CLAMPING AND CABLE TYING1. Be sure to clamp the wire.2. Never remove the cable tie used for tying the wires together.

Should it be inadvertently removed, be sure to tie the wires with anew cable tie.

Page 7: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 7

Fig.1

CRT SOCKET PWB

FRONT CONTROL PWB (1/2)

FRONT CONTROL PWB (2/2)

MAIN PWB

CHASSIS BASE

CONTROL BASE

Fig-2

(×4)

(×4)

(×4)

(×16)A

SPEAKER

PICTURE TUBE

SPEAKER

REAR COVER

CLAW B

D

C

CLAW B

AV TERMINAL BOARD

G

G

FRONT CABINET

CONTROL BASE

[FRONT SIDE]

CHASSISBASE

E

F

Fig.2

Page 8: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

8 No. 51839

REMOVING THE CRT

* Replacement of the CRT should be performed by 2 or more persons.

• After removing the rear cover, chassis etc.,1. Putting the CRT change table on soft cloth, the CRT change table

should also be covered with such soft cloth (shown in Fig. 2).2. While keeping the surface of CRT down, mount the TV set on the

CRT change table balanced will as shown in Fig. 3.3. Remove 4 screws marked by arrows with a box type screwdriver as

shown in Fig. 3.

• Since the cabinet will drop when screws have been removed, be sureto support the cabinet with hands.

4. After 4 screws have been removed, put the cabinet slowly on cloth(At this time, be carefully so as not to damage the front surface of thecabinet) shown in Fig. 4.

• The CRT should be assembled according to the opposite sequenceof its dismounting steps.

* The CRT change table should preferably be smaller that the CRT sur-face, and its height be about 35cm.

COATING OF SILICON GREASE FOR ELECTRICAL IN-SULATION ON THE CRT ANODE CAP SECTION.

• Subsequent to replacement of the CRT and HV transformer or repairof the anode cap, etc. by dismounting them, be sure to coat silicongrease for electrical insulation as shown in Fig. 5.

1. Wipe around the anode button with clean and dry cloth. (Fig. 5)2. Coat silicon grease on the section around the anode button. At this

time, take care so that any silicon greases dose not sticks to theanode button. (Fig. 6)

Silicon grease product No. KS - 650N

Fig. 2

CRT CHANGE TABLE

APPROX.35cm

CLOTH

Fig. 3

CRT

BOXTYPESCREWDRIVER

CRTCHANGETABLE

Fig. 4

CRTCHANGE TABLE

CRT

CABINET

Fig. 5

Anode buttonCRT

Silicon greasecoating

Fig. 6

Silicon grease should be coated by 5mm or more from the outside diameter of anode cap.

Approx.20mm (Do notcoat grease onthis section

Anode button(No sticking ofsilicon grease)

Anode cap

Coating positionof silicon grease

Page 9: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 9

REPLACEMENT OF MEMORY IC1. MEMORY IC

This TV uses the following memory IC.Memory IC: IC1702 on MAIN PW Board

The memory IC memorizes data for correctly operating the videoand deflection circuits.When replacing the memory IC, be sure touse the same type IC written with the initial values of data.In otherwords, use the specific IC listed in “PRINTED WIRING BOARDPARTS LIST”. For its mounting location, refer to “ADJUSTMENTLOCATIONS”.

2. PROCEDURE FOR REPLACING MEMORY IC

(1) Power offSwitch the power off and unplug the power cord from the walloutlet.

(2) Replacing the memory ICReplace the memory IC with new one. Be sure to use the memoryIC written with the initial data values.

(3) Power onPlug the power cord into the wall outlet and switch the power on.

(4) Check and setting of SYSTEM CONSTANT SET:1) Press the DISPLAY key and the PICTURE MODE key on the

remote control unit simultaneously.The SERVICE MENU screen will be displayed.(See Fig.1.)

2) In the SERVICE MENU, press the DISPLAY key and PIC-TURE MODE key simultaneously.Then,the SYSTEM CON-STANT SET screen will be displayed.(See Fig.2.)

3) Check whether the setting values of the SYSTEM CONSTANTSET are the same as those indicated in Table1.If the value is different, select the setting item with the MENU&/^ key, and set the correct value with the MENU –/+key.

4) Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

(5) Receive channel settingRefer to the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS and set the receivechannels (channels preset).

(6) User settingCheck the user setting values in Table 2, and if setting value isdifferent, set the correct value.For setting, refer to the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.

(7) Setting of SERVICE MENUVerify the setting for each setting item in the SERVICEMENU.(See Table 3.) If readjustment is necessary, perform ad-justment referring to “SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS”.

NAME OF REMOTE CONTROL KEYS

1. IF3. DEF5. PRESET7. PLUG & PLAY (OFF)

2. VC

6. AUDIO4. VSM PRESET

SERVICE MENU

SERVICE MENU

1-7 : SELECT DISPLAY : EXIT

[AV-29LS/LS-AU/LH]

******* **** ***** ***** **** **** *** ***

1. IF3. DEF5. PRESET6. PLUG & PLAY (OFF)

2. VC4. VSM PRESET

SERVICE MENU

1-6 : SELECT DISPLAY : EXIT

[AV-29LX/LX-A/LX-AU, AV-2908TEE]

******* **** ***** ***** **** **** *** ***

SYSTEM CONSTANT-I

SELECT BY

OPERATE BY +- DISPLAY

COMBTILT

MULTI

YESYES

TEXT YESSUPER BASS NOLANGUAGE E / R / C

SYSTEM CONSTANT SET 1

SYSTEM

MENU 89

SYSTEM CONSTANT-II

SELECT BY

OPERATE BY +- DISPLAY

BILINGUALB / B SOUND

YES

NONO

TUNER MUCOLOUR AUTO NO

SYSTEM CONSTANT SET 2

MSP

MENU 89

SYSTEM CONSTANT-III

SELECT BY

OPERATE BY +- DISPLAY

500 kHz250 kHz

010

010010

156.25 kHz 01031.25 kHz 010

SYSTEM CONSTANT SET 3

LOCK 1 MHz

MENU 89

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

I/II

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

MENUDISPLAY

MENU

MENU +MENU

PICTUREMODE

Page 10: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

10 No. 51839

Setting item Setting contentSetting value

MULTI TRIPLE

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

MU MA

YES NO

000 024

000 024

000 024

000 024

000 024

E/R/C E/R/A/F

E/F E/A

E/R E/C E/A/F

AV-29LS AV-29LH AV-29LXAV-29LS-AU AV-29LX-AU AV-2908TEEAV-29LX-A

SYSTEM

COMB

TILT

TEXT

SUPPER BASS

LANGUAGE

MSP

BILINGUAL

B/B SOUND

TUNER

COLOUR AUTO

LOCK 1MHz

500KHz

250KHz

156.25KHz

31.25KHz

MULTI

YES

YES

NO

E/R/C

YES

NO

NO

MU

NO

020

020

020

015

015

NO

NO

E/C E/R/A/F E/R/C E/R

YES NO

YES NO

PANEURO

RUSSIAN

SETTING OF SYSTEM CONSTANT SET

Table 1

Page 11: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 11

Setting item Setting value

SUB POWER ON

CHANNEL POSITION 1 POSITION

CHANNEL PRESET REFER TO ADJ. MANUAL

VOLUME 15 ± 2

TV/VIDEO TV

VNR OFF

COMPRESS (16:9) OFF

AUTO SHUTOFF OFF

CHILD LOCK OFF

BLUE BACK ON

VIDEO-2 SET VIDEO

LANGUAGE ENG

MONO SURROUND OFF [AV-29LX/LX-A/LX-AU/AV-2908TEE]

AI VOLUME ON

ON SCREEN DISPLAY POSITION INDICATION

COLOUR SYSTEM PAL

SOUND SYSTEM B/G

STEREO MODE STEREO [AV-29LS/LS-AU/LH]

PICTURE MODE-VSM BRIGHT

OFF TIMER 00

ECO SENSOR OFF

BASS CENTRE

TREBLE CENTRE

BALANCE CENTRE

PICTURE TILT 00

USER SETTING VALUES

Table 2

Page 12: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

12 No. 51839

1. IF 1. VCO

2. DELAY POINT

2. VC 1. CUTOFF(R/G)

2. DRIVE(R/G/B)

3. BRIGHT

4. CONT

5. COLOUR

6. TINT

7. SHARP

8. YDELAY

3. DEF 1. VER. SLOPE

2. VER. HEIGHT

3. VER. POSITION

4. VER. SCURVE

5. HOR. POSITION

6. HOR. WIDTH

7. EW-PIN

8. EW-TRAPEZ

9. UP CORNER

10. DW CORNER

11. HOR. PARALL

12. HOR. BOW

13. V. ZOOM

4. VSM PRESET 1. TINT

(BRIGHT/STD/SOFT) 2. COLOUR

3. BRIGHT

4. CONT

5. SHARP

Service menu Setting item

SERVICE MENU SETTING ITEMS

Service menu Setting item

5. PRESET 1. CB

2. ACL

3. MUS

4. MAT

5. FCO

6. BPS

7. IFLH

8. VID

9. STM

10. AFCW

11. VSW

12. FFI

13. AGC

14. CL

15. AKB

16. HBL

17. BKS

18. READ STATUS

19. VNR

6. AUDIO 1. ERROR LIMIT

[Only AV-29LS/LS-AU/LH] 2. A2 ID THR

3. SOUND SYSTEM

6 / 7. PLUG & PLAY(OFF)

Do not adjust

Do not adjust

Do not adjust

Do not adjust

Do not adjust

Table 3

Page 13: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 13

a CAUTIONS1. Avoid heating for more than 3 seconds.2. Do not rub the electrodes and the resist parts of the pattern.3. When removing a chip part, melt the solder adequately.4. Do not reuse a chip part after removing it.

a SOLDERING IRON1. Use a high insulation soldering iron with a thin pointed end of it.2. A 30w soldering iron is recommended for easily removing parts.

a REPLACEMENT STEPS1. How to remove Chip parts

Resistors, capacitors, etc.(1) As shown in the figure, push the part with tweezers and alter-

nately melt the solder at each end.

(2) Shift with tweezers and remove the chip part.

Transistors, diodes, variable resistors, etc.(1) Apply extra solder to each lead.

(2) As shown in the figure, push the part with tweezers and alter-nately melt the solder at each lead. Shift and remove the chippart.

Note : After removing the part, remove remaining solder from thepattern.

REPLACEMENT OF CHIP COMPONENT

2. How to install Chip parts Resistors, capacitors, etc.

(1) Apply solder to the pattern as indicated in the figure.

(2) Grasp the chip part with tweezers and place it on the solder.Then heat and melt the solder at both ends of the chip part.

Transistors, diodes, variable resistors, etc.(1) Apply solder to the pattern as indicated in the figure.(2) Grasp the chip part with tweezers and place it on the solder.(3) First solder lead A as indicated in the figure.

(4) Then solder leads B and C.

SOLDER SOLDER

A

B

C

A

B

C

Page 14: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

14 No. 51839

SERVICE ADJUSTMENTSADJUSTMENT PREPARATION:1. You can make the necessary adjustments for this unit with either the remote control unit or with the adjustment equipment and parts

as given below.2. Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values which set the

screen to its optimum condition may differ from the initial settings.3. Make sure that AC power is turned on correctly.4. Turn on the power for the set and test equipment before use, and start the adjustment procedures after waiting at least 30 minutes.5. Unless otherwise specified, prepare the most suitable reception or input signal for adjustment.6. Never touch any adjustment parts, which are not specified in the list for this adjustment-variable resistors, transformers, capacitors, etc.7. Presetting before adjustment.

Unless otherwise specified in the adjustment instructions, preset the following functions with the remote control unit.

Setting item Setting value

PICTURE MODE(VSM) BRIGHT

VNR OFF

BASS,TREBLE,BALANCE CENTRE

TINT,COLOUR,BRIGHT,CONT,SHARP CENTRE

MEASURING INSTRUMENT1. DC voltmeter (or Digital voltmeter)2. Oscilloscope3. Signal generator (Pattern generator) [PAL/SECAM/NTSC]4. Remote control unit

ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

• B1 POWER SUPPLY

• FOCUS adjustment

• DELAY POINT adjustment

• VC (VIDEO/CHROMA) circuit board adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (Low light) adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (High light) adjustmentSUB BRIGHT adjustmentSUB CONT adjustmentSUB COLOUR adjustmentSUB TINT adjustment

• User mode setting position

• DEFLECTION circuit adjustmentVER. SLOPE adjustmentVER. POSITION adjustmentV. ZOOM adjustmentHOR. POSITION adjustmentHOR. WIDTH adjustmentEW-PIN adjustmentEW-TRAPEZ adjustmentVER. SCURVE adjustmentUP CORNER and DW CORNER adjustmentHOR. PARALL adjustmentHOR. BOW adjustment

• VSM PRESET adjustment

• PRESET adjustment

• AUDIO adjustment

• PURITY and CONVERGENCE adjustmentsPURITY adjustmentSTATIC CONVERGENCE adjustmentDYNAMIC CONVERGENCE adjustment

Page 15: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 15

ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

E1

TOP

CRT EARTH(BRAIDED ASS'Y)

U

TP-47B

TP-47G

HV

6 1

GND B1

UPPER : FOCUS (F1)

MIDDLE : FOCUS (F2)

IC702

CRT SOCKET PWB (SOLDER SIDE)

T8 1

1 6

FRONT

FRONT

AV IN/OUT

HVT

MAIN PWB

FRONT CONTROL PWB(1/2) FRONT CONTROL PWB(2/2)

J304 J303 J302S804

S805S806 S802

S803S801 J801

CN003

CN001CN001

CN002

W

POWER SW.

R

S901

S801 : CH UP +S802 : CH DOWN –S803 : MENUS804 : TV/VIDEOS805 : VOL UP+S806 : VOL DOWN –

1

1 8

165

S

U

LOWER : SCREEN

TU001

J804J801 J802 J803

IC701

ZCN001

W

TDEG

TP-E

Page 16: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

16 No. 51839

BASIC OPERATION IN SERVICE MENU1. TOOL OF SERVICE MENU OPERATION

Operate the SERVICE MENU with the remote control unit.

2. SERVICE MENU ITEMSWith the SERVICE MENU,various settings (adjustments)can be made,and they are broadly classified in the following items of settings:

• 1.IF ......................................For entering/adjusting the setting values (adjustment values)of the IF circuit.

• 2.VC ....................................For entering/adjusting the setting values (adjustment values)of the VIDEO/CHROMA circuit.

• 3.DEF ..................................For entering/adjusting the setting values (adjustment values)of the DEFLECTION circuit.

• 4.VSM PRESET ..................For setting the values of STANDARD,SOFT and BRIGHT(VSM:video status memory)

• 5.PRESET ...........................For setting the values of the pteset.

• 6.AUDIO .............................. For entering/adjusting the setting values (adjustment values)of the multiplicity sound circuit.[Only AV-29LS/LS-AU/LH]

• 6/7. PLUG & PLAY (OFF). ..This is not used for service.

3. BASIC OPERATION IN SERVICE MENU(1) How to enter SERVICE MENU

Press the DISPLAY key and the PICTURE MODE key on the remote control unit simultaneously.The SERVICE MENU screen will be displayed. (See Fig. 1 on the next page.)

(2) Selection of SUB MENU SCREENPress one of the keys 1 to 7 on the remote control unit,and select the SUB MENU SCREEN from the SERVICE MENU.(See Fig.1 on the nextpage.)

SERVICE MENU → SUB MENU 1. IF2. VC3. DEF4. VSM PRESET5. PRESET6. AUDIO [Only AV-29LS/LS-AU/LH]6/7. PLUG & PLAY (OFF)

(3) Method of Setting*Once the setting values are set,they are memorized automatically.*It must not adjust without inputting a signal.

1) 1. IF[1.VCO ]

This is not used for service.[2.DELAY POINT ]

(a) 1 Key ........................ Select 1. IF(b) 2 Key ........................ Select 2.DELAY POINT.(c) MENU –/+Key ........... Adjust the setting value.(d) DISPLAY Key ........... When this is pressed twice, you will return to the SERVICE MENU.

2) 2. VC, 3. DEF, 4. VSM PRESET, 5. PRESET and 6. AUDIO(a) 2 ~6 Keys ................. Select one from 2. VC, 3. DEF, 4. VSM PRESET, 5. PRESET and 6. AUDIO.(b) MENU &/^ key ....... Select setting items.(c) MENU –/+Key ........... Adjust the setting values of the setting items.

• Use the number keys on the remote control unit for setting of WHITE BALANCE.For the setting, refer to each item concerned.

(d) DISPLAY Key ........... When this is pressed, you will return to the SERVICE MENU.

3) 6/7. PLUG & PLAY (OFF)This is not used for service.

(4) Release of SERVICE MENUAfter completing the setting, return to the SERVICE MENU by pressing the DISPLAY key, then again press the DISPLAY key to return to thenormal screen.

Page 17: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 17

Fig. 1

1-2 : SELECT DISPLAY : EXIT

SUB MENU 1. IF

SUB MENU 2. VC

50 Hz

Setting item

1. ERROR LIMIT 2. A2 ID THR 3. SOUND SYSTEM

Setting item

1. CUTOFF (R/G) 2. DRIVE (R/G/B) 3. BRIGHT 4. CONT 5. COLOR 6. TINT 7. SHARP 8. YDELAY

4 : 3 / 16 : 9, 50Hz / 60Hz

1. VER. SLOPE 2. VER. HEIGHT 3. VER. POSITION 4. VER. SCURVE 5. HOR. POSITION 6. HOR. WIDTH

Setting item

7. EW-PIN 8. EW-TRAPEZ 9. UP CORNER10. DW CORNER11. HOR. PARALL12. HOR. BOW13. V. ZOOM

1. IF3. DEF5. PRESET7. PLUG & PLAY (OFF)

2. VC

6. AUDIO4. VSM PRESET

SERVICE MENU

SERVICE MENU

1-7 : SELECT DISPLAY : EXIT

[AV-29LS/LS-AU/LH]

******* **** ***** ***** **** **** *** ***

1. IF3. DEF5. PRESET6. PLUG & PLAY (OFF)

2. VC4. VSM PRESET

SERVICE MENU

1-6 : SELECT DISPLAY : EXIT

[AV-29LX/LX-A/LX-AU, AV-2908TEE]

******* **** ***** ***** **** **** *** ***

AUDIO1. ERROR LIMITC AD BITSNICAM ERROR

*****MHz

*************

****

SUB MENU 6.AUDIO[AV-29LS/LS-AU/LH]

89: SELECT

- /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

MENU 89: SELECT

MENU - /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

SUB MENU 3. DEF

50Hz

1. VCO

2. DELAY POINT

IF

PAL

1. CUTOFF (R)(G)

****

V/C

PAL

1. VER. SLOPE **DEF 4 : 3

MENU 89: SELECT

MENU - /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

SUB MENU 5. PRESET

PAL

1. CB *PRESET 50Hz B/G

MENU 89: SELECT

MENU - /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

SUB MENU 4. VSM PRESET

TINT **COLOUR **BRIGHT **CONT **SHARP **

BRIGHT

MENU 89: SELECT

MENU - /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

VCO (CW) *****MHz

DISPLAY : EXIT

TOO HIGHABOVE REFERENCEBELOW REFERENCETOO LOW

DELAY POINT VHF

AGC TAKE-OVER **

- /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

1. CB 2. ACL 3. MUS 4. MAT 5. FCO 6. BPS 7. IFLH 8. VID 9. STM

Setting item

10. AFCW11. VSW12. FFI13. AGC14. CL15. AKB16. HBL17. BKS18. READ STATUS19. VNR

BRIGHT / STD / SOFT

1. TINT 2. COLOUR 3. BRIGHT 4. CONT 5. SHARP

Setting item

Page 18: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

18 No. 51839

ADJUSTMENTS

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

Check ofB1 POWERSUPPLY

SignalGenerator

DC Voltmeter

B1 (pin 1)GND (pin 5)[CN00S connector]

1. Receive a black and white signal.2. Connect a DC voltmeter between B1 and GND

(between pins 1 and 5 of the connector CN00S).3. Make sure that the voltage is DC135 ± 2V.

Adjustmentof FOCUS

FOCUS VR1,2[In HVT]

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

FOCUS ADJUSTMENT

B1 POWER SUPPLY

Signalgenerator

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of B1 POWER SUPPLY, SUB BRIGHT and SUB CONT.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.• The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUS ad-justment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should be reconfirmingPURITY adjustment.

1. Receive a cross-hatch signal.2. While looking at the screen center, adjust the FOCUS VR2 (F2) so

that the horizontal lines will be clear and in fine detail.3. Adjust the FOCUS VR1 (F1) so that the vertical lines will be clear

and in fine detail.4. Make sure that the picture is in focus even when the screen gets

darkened.

Adjustmentof DELAYPOINT

DELAY POINT(AGC TAKE-OVER)

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

DELAY POINT ADJUSTMENT

Remotecontrol unit

1. Receive a black and white signal (colour off).2. Select 1. IF from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 2. DELAY POINT by pressing the 2 key on the remote con-

trol.4. Adjust the MENU –/+ key until video noise disappears.5. Press the DISPLAY key three times to return to the normal screen.6. Turn to other channels and make sure that there are no irregulari-

ties.

SettingVariable Initial setting(Adjustment)range valueitem

DELAY POINT 00 – 63 15(AGC TAKE-OVER)

Page 19: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 19

VC (VIDEO/CHROMA) CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

The setting (adjustment) using the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values.The setting values which adjust the screen to the optimum condition can be different from the initial setting values.

• Do not change the initial setting values of the setting (adjustment) items not listed in “ADJUSTMENT”.

[SUB MENU 2. VC] : Do not adjust.

Setting (Adjustment) item Variable rangeInitial setting value

PAL SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 COMPONENT

1 CUTOFF(R/G) –7 — +8 0 0

2 DRIVE(R/G/B) –30 — +31 0 0

3 BRIGHT(COM./TV/V-1/V-2/V-3) –30 — +31 0/–16/0/0/+2 –1

4 CONT –30 — +31 –16 —

5 COLOUR –30 — +31 –5 –3 –12 +1 +10

6 TINT (TV/VIDEO) –30 — +31 — — –15/+6 +1/+1 —

7 SHARP (TV/VIDEO) –30 — +31 –24/–10 0

8 YDELAY (TV/VIDEO/S) –8 — +7 0/+1/0 +5/+1/+1 0/+1/+1 +5/0/+1 —

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

Adjustmentof WHITEBALANCE(Low light)

1.CUTOFF (R)CUTOFF (G)

SCREEN VR[In HVT]

Note:• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

1. Receive a PAL black and white signal (colour off).2. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 1. CUTOFF (R) and (G) with MENU &/^ key, and set each

value to initial setting value with the 4 and 7 keys, or 5 and 8 keys onthe remote control unit.

4. Press the 1 key on the remote control unit to produce a single hori-zontal line.

5. Turn the SCREEN VR fully counterclockwise,then slowly turn it clock-wise to where a red,blue,or green colour is faintly visible.

6. Use the keys 4 and 7 or 5 and 8 on the remote control unit andadjust the other 2 colours to where the single horizontal line ap-pears white.

7. Turn the SCREEN VR to where the single horizontal line glows faintly.8. Press the 2 key to return to 1. CUTOFF screen.9. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

Setting (Adjustment) Variable Initial settingItem range value

1. CUT OFFR –7 — +8 0

G –7 — +8 0

PAL

1. CUTOFF

50 Hz

(R)(G)

****

V/C

MENU 89: SELECT

MENU - /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

G. CUTOFF (8)

H.LINE OFF

H.LINE ON

1 2 3

4

7 8 9

5 6

R. CUTOFF (8)

R. CUTOFF (9)

G.CUTOFF (9)

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

Page 20: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

20 No. 51839

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofSUBBRIGHT

Remotecontrol unit

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE and HIGH LIGHTWHITE BALANCE.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 3. BRIGHT with the MENU &/^ key.4. Set the initial setting value with the MENU –/+ key.5. If the brightness is not best with the initial setting value,make fine

adjustment until you get the best brightness.6. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

3. BRIGHT

AdjustmentofSUB CONT

Remotecontrol unit

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB BRIGHT.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

1. Receive A broadcast.2. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 4. CONT with the MENU &/^ key.4. Set the initial setting value with the MENU –/+ key.5. If the contrast is not best with the initial setting value,make fine ad-

justment until you get the best contrast.6. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

4. CONT

Adjustmentof WHITEBALANCE(High light)

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrolunit

1.DRIVE (R)DRIVE (G)DRIVE (B)

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

1. Receive a PAL black and white signal (colour off).2. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 2. DRIVE (R), (G) and (B) with MENU &/^ key,and set each

value to initial setting value with the 4 to 9 keys on the remote con-trol unit.

4. Use the keys 4 to 9 to produce a white screen.5. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

Setting (Adjustment) Variable Initial settingItem range value

R –30 — +31 0

1. DRIVE G –30 — +31 0

B –30 — +31 0

G. DRIVE (8)

1 2 3

4

7 8 9

5 6

R. DRIVE (8) B. DRIVE (8)

B. DRIVE (9)R. DRIVE (9)

G.DRIVE (9)

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

PAL

1. DRIVE

50 Hz

(R)(G)

****

(B) **

V/C

MENU 89: SELECT

MENU - /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

Page 21: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 21

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofSUBCOLOUR-I

Remotecontrol unit

[Method of adjustment without measuring instrument]

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB CONT.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

– PAL COLOUR –1. Receive a PAL broadcast.2. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 5. COLOUR with the MENU &/^ key.4. Set the initial setting value for PAL COLOUR with the MENU –/+ key.5. If the colour is not best with the initial setting value,make fine ad-

justment until you get the best colour.6. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

– SECAM COLOUR –7. Receive a SECAM broadcast.8. Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote control unit to

select the SECAM colour system.9. Make fine adjustment of SECAM COLOUR in the same way as for

“PAL COLOUR”.

– NTSC 3.58 COLOUR –10. Receive a NTSC 3.58MHz broadcast.11. Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote control unit to

select the NTSC 3.58 colour system.12. Make similar fine adjustment of NTSC 3.58 COLOUR in the same

way as for “PAL COLOUR”.

– NTSC 4.43 COLOUR –When adjustment is done for NTSC 3.58 COLOUR,appropriatevalues are automatically set for NTSC 4.43 COLOUR.

5. COLOUR

Adjustmentof SUBCOLOUR-II

Signalgenerator

Oscilloscope

Remotecontrol unit

5. COLOUR [Method of adjustment using measuring instrument]

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB CONT.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

– PAL COLOUR –1. Receive a PAL colour bar signal (full field colour bar 75% white).2. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 5. COLOUR with the MENU &/^ key.4. Set the initial setting value of PAL COLOUR with the MENU –/+ key.5. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-47G and TP-E.6. Adjust PAL COLOUR to set the value (A) in the figure to +8V (VW-G).

– SECAM COLOUR –7. Receive a SECAM colour bar signal (full field colour bar 75% white).8. Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote control unit to

select the SECAM colour system.9. Set the initial setting value of SECAM COLOUR with the MENU –/+ key.10. Adjust SECAM COLOUR to set the value (A) in the figure to +2V

(VW-G).

– NTSC 3.58 COLOUR –11. Receive a NTSC 3.58 colour bar signal (full field colour bar 75% white).12. Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote control unit to

select the NTSC 3.58 colour system.13. Set the initial setting value of NTSC 3.58 COLOUR with the MENU

–/+ key.14. Adjust NTSC 3.58 COLOUR to set the value (A) in the figure to

+2V (VW-G).

– NTSC 4.43 COLOUR –When adjustment is done for NTSC 3.58 COLOUR,appropriatevalues are automatically set for NTSC 4.43 COLOUR.

TP-47GTP-E (H)[CRTSOCKETPWB]

MgB

(–)0V(+)

R

Cy

YW G

(A)

Page 22: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

22 No. 51839

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofSUB TINT-I

Remotecontrol unit

6. TINT [Method of adjustment without measuring instrument]

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB CONT.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

– NTSC 3.58 TINT –1. Receive a NTSC 3.58 colour bar signal (full field colour bar 75%

white).2. Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote control unit to

select the NTSC 3.58 colour system.3. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.4. Select 6. TINT with the MENU &/^ key.5. Set the initial setting value of NTSC 3.58 with the MENU –/+ key.6. If you cannot get the best tint with the initial setting value, make fine

adjustment until you get the best tint.7. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

– NTSC 4.43 TINT –When adjustment is done for NTSC 3.58 TINT,appropriate val-ues are automatically set for NTSC 4.43 TINT.

MgB

(–)0V(+)

R

Cy

YW

(B)

G

Adjustmentof SUBSUB TINT-II

Signalgenerator

Oscilloscope

Remotecontrol unit

6. TINT [Method of adjustment using measuring instrument]

Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB CONT.

• Set PICTURE MODE (VSM) to “BRIGHT”.

– NTSC 3.58 TINT –1. Receive a NTSC 3.58 colour bar signal (full field colour bar 75%

white).2. Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote control unit to

select the NTSC 3.58 colour system.3. Select 2. VC from the SERVICE MENU.4. Select 6. TINT with the MENU &/^ key.5. Set the initial setting value of NTSC 3.58 with the MENU –/+ key.6. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-47G and TP-E.7. Adjust NTSC 3.58 TINT to set the value (B) in the figure to +0V (VW-

cy).8. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

– NTSC 4.43 TINT –When adjustment is done for NTSC 3.58 TINT,appropriate val-ues are automatically set for NTSC 4.43 TINT.

TP-47GTP-E (H)[CRTSOCKETPWB]

Page 23: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 23

DEFLECTION CIRCUIT ADJUSTMENT

[SUB MENU 3. DEF]

1. VER. SLOPE –31 — +31 +3 0 — — —

2. VER. HEIGHT –31 — +31 +31 0 –23 –24 —

3. VER. POSITION –31 — +31 –5 –1 — — —

4. VER. SCURVE –31 — +31 –21 0 — — —

5. HOR. POSITION –31 — +31 +8 +7 — — +7

6. HOR. WIDTH –31 — +31 +11 –1 — — —

7. EW-PIN –31 — +31 –11 –1 –13 –12 —

8. EW-TRAPEZ –31 — +31 0 0 — — —

9. UP CORNER –31 — +31 –25 0 0 0 —

10. DW CORNER –31 — +31 –25 0 0 0 —

11. HOR. PARALL –31 — +31 0 0 — — —

12. HOR. BOW –31 — +31 0 0 — — —

13. V.ZOOM –31 — +31 +7 –1 +6 +6 —

Setting

(Adjustment)item

Initial setting value

Variable range COMPONENT

DVD(50Hz/60Hz)

4:3

50Hz 60Hz

COMPRESS(16:9)

50Hz 60Hz

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofVER. SLOPE

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

1. VER. SLOPE 1. Receive a PAL circle pattern signal of vertical frequency 50Hz.2. Select 3. DEF from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 1. VER. SLOPE with the MENU &/^ key.4. Set the initial setting value of 1. VER. SLOPE with the MENU –/+

key.5. Adjust 1. VER. SLOPE to make “A = B” with the MENU –/+ key.

[fv : 50Hz mode]

B

A

Blanking line

AdjustmentofVER.POSITION

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

3. VER. POSITION 6. Select 3. VER. POSITION with the MENU &/^ key.7. Set the initial setting value of 3. VER. POSITION with the MENU –/

+ key.8. Adjust 3. VER. POSITION to make “A = B” with the MENU –/+ key.

(to be continued)

The setting (adjustment) using the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values.The setting values which adjust the screen to the optimum condition can be different from the initial setting values.

A

B

Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed the adjustments of SUB BRIGHT and SUB CONT.

Page 24: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

24 No. 51839

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofV. ZOOM

2. VER. HEIGHT13. V. ZOOM

9. Receive a PAL cross-hatch signal.10. Select 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU &/^ key.11. Set the initial setting value of 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU –/+

key.12. Select 13. V. ZOOM with the MENU &/^ key.13. Set the initial setting value of 13. V. ZOOM with the MENU –/+ key.14. Adjust 13. V. ZOOM and make the vertical screen size 91% of the

picture size with the MENU –/+ key.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

AdjustmentofHOR. POSITION

5. HOR. POSITION 15. Receive a PAL circle pattern signal.16. Select 5. HOR. POSITION with the MENU &/^ key.17. Set the initial setting value of 5. HOR. POSITION with the MENU –/+

key.18 Adjust 5. HOR POSITION to make “C=D” with the MENU –/+ key.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Screen size

Screensize91%

Picture size 100%

Picturesize100%

C D

AdjustmentofHOR. WIDTH

6. HOR. WIDTH 19. Receive a PAL cross-hatch signal.20. Select 6. HOR. WIDTH with the MENU &/^ key.21. Set the initial setting value of 6. HOR. WIDTH with the MENU –/+

key.22. Adjust 6. HOR. WIDTH and make the horizontal screen size 91%

of the picture size with the MENU –/+ key.

(to be continued)

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Screen size 91%

Screensize91%

Picture size 100%

Picturesize100%

Page 25: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 25

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofEW-PIN

7. EW-PIN 23. Select 7. EW-PIN with the MENU &/^ key.24. Set the initial setting value of 7. EW-PIN with the MENU –/+ key.25. Adjust 7. EW-PIN so that the first vertical lines at the left and right

edges on the screen are straight.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

AdjustmentofEW-TRAPEZ

8. EW-TRAPEZ 26. Select 8. EW-TRAPEZ with the MENU &/^ key.27. Set the initial setting value of 8. EW-TRAPEZ with the MENU –/+

key.28. Adjust 8. EW-TRAPEZ so that the vertical lines at the left and right

edges on the screen are in parallel.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

AdjustmentofVER. SCURVE

4. VER. SCURVE 29. Select 4. VER. SCURVE with the MENU &/^ key.30. Set the initial setting value of 4. VER. SCURVE with the MENU –/+

key.31. Adjust 4. VER. SCURVE so that the spaces of each line on TOP,

CENTER and BOTTOM become uniform.

(to be continued)

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Straight

Parallel

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

Page 26: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

26 No. 51839

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofUP CORNERandDW CORNER

9. UP CORNER10. DW CORNER

32. Select 9. UP CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.33. Set the initial setting value of 9. UP CORNER with the MENU –/+

key.34. Select 10. DW CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.35. Set the initial setting value of 10. DW CORNER with the MENU –/+

key.36. Adjust 9. UP CORNER and 10. DW CORNER so that the vertical

lines at the four corners on the screen are straight.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

AdjustmentofHOR. PARALL

11. HOR. PARALL 37. Select 11. HOR. PARALL with the menu &/^ key.38. Set the initial setting value of 11. HOR. PARALL with the menu –/+

key.39. Adjust 11. HOR. PARALL to optimize the parallelogram distortion.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

AdjustmentofHOR. BOW

12. HOR. BOW 40. Select 12. HOR. BOW with the menu &/^ key.41. Set the initial setting value of Select 12. HOR. BOW with the menu

–/+ key.42. Adjust 12. HOR. BOW to optimize the horizontal arc distortion.43. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Straight

Page 27: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 27

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofVER. SLOPE

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

1. VER. SLOPE 1. Receive a NTSC circle pattern signal of vertical frequency 60Hz.2. Select 3. DEF from the SERVICE MENU.3. Select 1. VER. SLOPE with the MENU &/^ key.4. Set the initial setting value of 1. VER. SLOPE with the MENU –/+

key.5. Adjust 1. VER. SLOPE to make “A = B” with the MENU –/+ key.

[fv : 60Hz mode]

B

A

Blanking line

AdjustmentofVER.POSITION

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

3. VER. POSITION 6. Select 3. VER. POSITION with the MENU &/^ key.7. Set the initial setting value of 3. VER. POSITION with the MENU –/

+ key.8. Adjust 3. VER. POSITION to make “A = B” with the MENU –/+ key.

A

B

AdjustmentofV. ZOOM

2. VER. HEIGHT13. V. ZOOM

9. Receive a NTSC cross-hatch signal.10. Select 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU &/^ key.11. Set the initial setting value of 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU –/+

key.12. Select 13. V. ZOOM with the MENU &/^ key.13. Set the initial setting value of 13. V. ZOOM with the MENU –/+ key.14. Adjust 13. V. ZOOM and make the vertical screen size 91% of the

picture size with the MENU –/+ key.

(to be continued)

Screen size

Screensize91%

Picture size 100%

Picturesize100%

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Page 28: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

28 No. 51839

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofHOR. POSITION

5. HOR. POSITION 15. Receive a NTSC circle pattern signal.16. Select 5. HOR. POSITION with the MENU &/^ key.17. Set the initial setting value of 5. HOR. POSITION with the MENU –

/+ key.18. Adjust 5. HOR. POSITION to make “C=D” with the MENU –/+ key.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

C D

AdjustmentofHOR. WIDTH

6. HOR. WIDTH 19. Receive a NTSC cross-hatch signal.20. Select 6. HOR. WIDTH with the MENU &/^ key.21. Set the initial setting value of 6. HOR. WIDTH with the MENU –/+

key.22. Adjust 6. HOR. WIDTH and make the horizontal screen size 91%

of the picture size with the MENU –/+ key.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Screen size 91%

Screensize91%

Picture size 100%

Picturesize100%

AdjustmentofEW-TRAPEZ

8. EW-TRAPEZ 23. Select 8. EW-TRAPEZ with the MENU &/^ key.24. Set the initial setting value of 8. EW-TRAPEZ with the MENU –/+

key.25. Adjust 8. EW-TRAPEZ so that the vertical lines at the left and right

edges on the screen are in parallel.

(to be continued)

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Parallel

Page 29: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 29

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofVER. SCURVE

4. VER. SCURVE 26. Select 4. VER. SCURVE with the MENU &/^ key.27.Set the initial setting value of 4. VER. SCURVE with the MENU –/+

key.28. Adjust 4. VER. SCURVE so that the spaces of each line on TOP,

CENTER and BOTTOM become uniform.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

AdjustmentofUP CORNERandDW CORNER

9. UP CORNER10. DW CORNER

29. Select 9. UP CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.30. Set the initial setting value of 9. UP CORNER with the MENU –/+

key.31. Sekect 10. DW CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.32. Set the initial setting value of 10. DW CORNER with the MENU –/+

key.33. Adjust 9. UP CORNER and 10. DW CORNER so that the vertical

lines at the four corners on the screen are straight.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

AdjustmentofHOR. PARALL

11. HOR. PARALL 34. Select 11. HOR. PARALL with the menu &/^ key.35. Set the initial setting value of 11. HOR. PARALL with the menu –/+

key.36. Adjust 11. HOR. PARALL to optimize the parallelogram distortion.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

AdjustmentofHOR. BOW

12. HOR. BOW 37. Select 12. HOR. BOW with the menu &/^ key.38. Set the initial setting value of Select 12. HOR. BOW with the menu

–/+ key.39. Adjust 12. HOR. BOW to optimize the horizontal arc distortion.40. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Straight

Page 30: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

30 No. 51839

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

1. Receive a PAL cross-hatch signal of vertical frequency 50Hz.2. Select COMPRESS from the MENU and set COMPRESS to ON.3. Select 3. DEF from the SERVCE MENU.4. Set the initial setting value of 13. V. ZOOM with the MENU –/+ key.5. Select 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU &/^ key.6. Set the initial setting value of 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU –/+

key.7. Adjust 2. VER. HEIGHT to set the vertical amplitude of the image to

295mm.

[COMPRESS (16 : 9), fv : 50Hz mode]

AdjustmentofV. ZOOM andVER. HEIGHT

AdjustmentofEW-PIN

8. Select 7. EW-PIN with the MENU &/^ key.9. Set the initial setting value of 7. EW-PIN with the MENU –/+ key.10. Adjust 7. EW-PIN so tha the first vertical lines at the left and right

edges on the screen are straight.

7. EW-PIN

AdjustmentofUP CORNERandDW CORNER

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

11. Select 9. UP CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.12. Set the initial setting value of 9. UP CORNER with the MENU –/+

key.13. Select 10. DW CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.14. Set the initial setting value of 10. DW CORNER with the MENU –/

+ key.15. Adjust 9. UP CORNER and 10. DW CORNER so that the vertical

lines at the four corners on the screen are straight.16. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

9. UP CORNER10. DW CORNER

Screen Size

295mmScreen Size

Straight

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrolunit

13. V. ZOOM2. VER. HEIGHT

Page 31: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 31

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

[COMPRESS (16 : 9), fv : 60Hz mode]

1. Receive a NTSC cross-hatch signal of vertical frequency 60Hz.2. Select COMPRESS from the MENU and set COMPRESS to ON.3. Select 3. DEF from the SERVCE MENU.4. Set the initial setting value of 13. V. ZOOM with the MENU –/+ key.5. Select 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU &/^ key.6. Set the initial setting value of 2. VER. HEIGHT with the MENU –/+

key.7. Adjust 2. VER. HEIGHT to set the vertical amplitude of the image to

295mm.

AdjustmentofV. ZOOM andVER. HEIGHT

AdjustmentofEW-PIN

8. Select 7. EW-PIN with the MENU &/^ key.9. Set the initial setting value of 7. EW-PIN with the MENU –/+ key.10. Adjust 7. EW-PIN so tha the first vertical lines at the left and right

edges on the screen are straight.

7. EW-PIN

AdjustmentofUP CORNERandDW CORNER

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

11. Select 9. UP CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.12. Set the initial setting value of 9. UP CORNER with the MENU –/+

key.13. Select 10. DW CORNER with the MENU &/^ key.14. Set the initial setting value of 10. DW CORNER with the MENU –/

+ key.15. Adjust 9. UP CORNER and 10. DW CORNER so that the vertical

lines at the four corners on the screen are straight.16. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

9. UP CORNER10. DW CORNER

Screen Size

295mmScreen Size

Straight

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrolunit

13. V. ZOOM2. VER. HEIGHT

Page 32: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

32 No. 51839

ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description

VSM PRESET ADJUSTMENT

ItemMeasuringinstrument

Test point Adjustment part Description

AdjustmentofHOR. POSITION

5. HOR. POSITION 1. Receive a PAL circle pattern signal to VIDEO-2 terminal.2. Select VIDEO-2 SET from the MENU and set VIDEO-2 SET to

COMPONENT.3. Select 3. DEF from the SERVICE MENU.4. Select 5. HOR. POSITION with the MENU &/^ key.5. Set the initial setting value of 5. HOR. POSITION with the MENU –/+

key.6 Adjust 5. HOR POSITION to make “C=D” with the MENU –/+ key.7. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.

Signalgenerator

Remotecontrol unit

C D

[COMPONENT, fv : 50/60Hz mode]

Setting ofVSMPRESET

1. TINT2. COLOUR3. BRIGHT4. CONT5. SHARP

Remotecontrol unit

1. Select 4. VSM PRESET from the SERVICE MENU.

2. Select BRIGHT with the PICTURE MODE key.

3. Adjust the MENU &/^ key and MENU –/+ key to reset the set val-ues of 1. TINT – 5. SHARP to the values shown in the table.

4. Respectively select the VSM PRESET mode for SOFT and STAND-ARD, and make similar adjustment as in 3 above.

5. Press the DISPLAY key twice to return to the normal screen.SUB MENU 4. VSM PRESET

TINT **COLOUR **BRIGHT **CONT **SHARP **

BRIGHT

MENU 89: SELECT

MENU - /+: OPERATE DISPLAY : EXIT

VSM presetVSM mode BRIGHT STANDARD SOFTSetting item

1. TINT SETTING VALUE

2. COLOUR SETTING VALUE

3. BRIGHT SETTING VALUE

4. CONT30

15

15

15

15 0

15 11 SETTING VALUE

5. SHARP SETTING VALUE

[Setting Values for SUB MENU 4. VSM PRESET]

Page 33: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 33

Setting item Variable range Initial setting value (fixed)

1. ERROR LIMIT (Do not adjust.) 000H — FF0H 100H

2. A2 ID THR (Do not adjust.) 00H — FFH 0AH

3. SOUND SYSTEM (Do not adjust.) — —

AUDIO ADJUSTMENT [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LH]

• Do not adjust 6. AUDIO (1.ERROR LIMIT, 2.A2 ID THR, 3.SOUND SYSTEM) in the SERVICE MENU as it requires no adjustment.

[SUB MENU 6. AUDIO]

PRESET ADJUSTMENT

• Do not adjust 5. PRESET in the SERVICE MENU as it requires no adjustment.

[SUB MENU 5. PRESET]

Setting item Variable range Initial setting value

1 CB 0/1 02 ACL 0/1 03 MUS 0/1 04 MAT 0/1 05 FCO 0/1 06 BPS 0/1 07 IFLH 0/1 08 VID 0/1 09 STM 0/1 010 AFCW 0/1 011 DIDEOSW 0/1 012 FFI 0/1 013 AGC 00/10/01 1014 CL 50 – 95 8915 AKB 0/1 016 HBL 0/1 017 BKS 0/1 118 READ STATUS — —19 VNR 00 – 63 25

Page 34: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

34 No. 51839

PURITY AND CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENTS

Note: The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUSadjustment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should bereconfirming PURITY adjustment.

PURITY ADJUSTMENT

1. Demagnetize CRT with the demagnetizer.

2. Loosen the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.

3. Remove the wedges.

4. Input a green raster signal from the signal generator, and turn thescreen to green raster.

5. Move the deflection yoke backward.

6. Bring the long lug of the purity magnets on the short lug and positionthem horizontally. (Fig. 2)

7. Adjust the gap between two lugs so that the GREEN RASTER willcome into the centre of the screen. (Fig. 3)

8. Move the deflection yoke forward, and fix the position of the deflec-tion yoke so that the whole screen will become green.

9. Insert the wedge to the top side of the deflection yoke so that it willnot move.

10. Input a crosshatch signal.

11. Verify that the screen is horizontal.

12. Input red and blue raster signals, and make sure that purity is prop-erly adjusted.

Fig. 1

• P/C MAGNETS

P : PURITY MAGNET4 : 4 POLES (convergence magnets)6 : 6 POLES (convergence magnets)

CRT

WEDGE

P

P / CMAGNETS

4 6

DEFLECTION YOKE

Fig. 2

Long lug

Short lug

PURITY MAGNETS

Bring the long lug over the short lugand position them horizontally.

Fig. 3

(FRONT VIEW) GREEN RASTER

CENTRE

Page 35: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 35

STATIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Input a crosshatch signal.

2. Using 4-pole convergence magnets, overlap the red and blue lines inthe centre of the screen (Fig. 4) and turn them to magenta (red/blue).

3. Using 6-pole convergence magnets, overlap the magenta(red/blue)and green lines in the centre of the screen and turn them to white.

4. Repeat 2 and 3 above, and make best convergence.

DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Move the deflection yoke up and down and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 5)

2. Move the deflection yoke left to right and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 6)

3. Repeat 1 and 2 above, and make best convergence.

• After adjustment, fix the wedge at the original position.Fasten the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.Fix the 6 magnets with glue.

RED

RED

RED

RED

BLUE

(FRONT VIEW)

(FRONT VIEW)

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE GREEN

GREENGREEN

GREEN

(FRONT VIEW)

GREEN GREEN

GREEN

GREEN

RED REDRED

RED

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Page 36: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

36 No. 51839

SELF-CHECK FUNCTIONS1. Outline

This model has self-check functions given below.When an abnormality has been detected,the SUB POWER is turned off and both ECO and ONTIMER LEDs flash to inform of the failure.An abnormality is detected by the signal input state of the control line connected to the microcomputer.

2. Self check items

Check item Details of detection Method of detection State of abnormality

3. Self check indicating function

When an abnormality has been detected at about 5 seconds afterthe power is turned on,the SUB POWER is turned off immediatelyand the LEDs flash.

Over-current protection

CRT NECK protection

An over-current on the low B lineis detected.

Operation of CRT NECK protec-tion circuit

The main microcomputer detectsthe possible abnormality at 30-msec.intervals and judges theresults in every 16 time. Of the16 times, if NG is detected morethan 9 times, it is judged thatthere is an abnormality.

DITTO

When an abnormality has beendetected, the SUB-POWER isturned off. While the SUB-POWER is being turned off, thePOWER key on the remote con-trol unit is not operational until thepower cord is taken out and putin again.

DITTO

[ Indication by the LEDs]

Item LEDs flashing intervals Priority of detection

1 Over-current protection At 0.2-second intervals 1

2 CRT NECK protection At 1-second intervals 2

Note: In case of 1 + 2, the item 1 is indicated.

After about5 seconds

Power on Start ofdetection

Detection ofan abnormality

SUB-POWER OFF

Flashing LEDs

Page 37: AV-29LS

Printed in JapanVP0106SW

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITEDHOME AV NETWORK BUSINESS UNIT 12, 3-chome, Moriya-cho, kanagawa-ku, Yokohama, kanagawa-prefecture, 221-8528, Japan

AV29LH-H #4AV29LXAU-H #4

AV2908TEE-H #4

AV29LSAU-H #4AV29LXA-H #4

AV29LS-H #4AV29LX-H #4

Page 38: AV-29LS

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LS(-AU) AV-29LX(-A)

AV-29LH AV-29LX(-AU)

AV-2908TEE

COLOUR TELEVISION

BASIC CHASSIS

CH

No. 51839June 2001

COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.

CD-ROM No. SML200106

RM-C352 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

I/II

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C357 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C353 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

I/II

RM-C355 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C352-1C[AV-29LS][AV-29LS(-AU)]

RM-C353-1C[AV-29LH]

RM-C355-1C[AV-2908TEE]

RM-C357-1C[AV-29LX][AV-29LX(-A)][AV-29LX(-AU)]

Page 39: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

q NOTE ON USING CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS1. SAFETY

The components identified by the symbol and shading arecritical for safety. For continued safety replace safety criticalcomponents only with manufactures recommended parts.

2. SPECIFIED VOLTAGE AND WAVEFORM VALUESThe voltage and waveform values have been measured under thefollowing conditions.

(1) Input signal : Colour bar signal(2) Setting positions of each knob/button and variable resistor

: Original setting position whenshipped

(3) Internal resistance of tester : DC 20kØ/V(4) Oscilloscope sweeping time : H ⇒ 20µS/div

: V ⇒ 5mS/div: Others ⇒ Sweeping time is

specified.(5) Voltage values : All DC voltage values

9Since the voltage values of signal circuit vary to some extent ac-cording to adjustments, use them as reference values.

3. INDICATION OF PARTS SYMBOL [EXAMPLE]• In the PW board : R1209 → R209

4. INDICATIONS ON THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM(1) Resistors• Resistance value

No unit : [Ø]k : [kØ]M : [MØ]

• Rated allowable powerNo indication : 1/16 [W]Others : As specified

• TypeNo indication : Carbon resistorOMR : Oxide metal film resistorMFR : Metal film resistorMPR : Metal plate resistorUNFR : Non-Flammable resistorFR : Fusible resistor

9Composition resistor 1/2 [W] is specified as 1/2S or Comp.

(2) Capacitors• Capacitance value

1 or higher : [pF]less than 1 : [µF]

• Withstand voltageNo indication : DC50[V]AC indicated : AC withstand voltage [V]Others : DC withstand voltage [V]

9 Electrolytic Capacitors47/50[Example] : Capacitance value [µF]/withstand voltage[V]

• TypeNo indication : Ceramic capacitorMY : Mylar capacitorMM : Metalized mylar capacitorPP : Polypropylene capacitorMPP : Metalized polypropylene capacitorMF : Metalized film capacitorTF : Thin film capacitorBP : Bipolar electrolytic capacitorTAN : Tantalum capacitor

(3) CoilsNo unit : [µH]Others : As specified

(4) Power Supply

: B1

: B2(12V)

: 9V

: 5V

9Respective voltage values are indicated

(5) Test point

: Test point

: Only test point display

(6) Connecting method: Connector

: Wrapping or soldering

: Receptacle

(7) Ground symbol

: LIVE side ground

: ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side ground

: EARTH ground

: DIGITAL ground

5. NOTE FOR REPAIRING SERVICEThis model’s power circuit is partly different in the GND. The differenceof the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND and theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND. Therefore, care must be takenfor the following points.

(1) Do not touch the LIVE side GND or the LIVE side GND and theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND simultaneously. If the above cau-tion is not respected, an electric shock may be caused. Therefore,make sure that the power cord is surely removed from the recepta-cle when, for example, the chassis is pulled out.

(2) Do not short between the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL)side GND or never measure with a measuring apparatus ( oscillo-scope, etc.) the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) sideGND at the same time. If the above precaution is not respected , afuse or any parts will be broken.

• Since the circuit diagram is a standard one, the circuit and cir-cuit constants may be subject to change for improvement with-out any notice.

June 2001 No. 51839

STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

AV-29LS AV-29LX AV-2908TEEAV-29LS(-AU) AV-29LX(-A)

AV-29LH AV-29LX(-AU)

Page 40: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

2-2 No.51839

CONTENTSSEMICONDUCTOR SHAPES ................................................................................................................................. 2-2

BLOCK DIAGRAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-3

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

E

C

B

OUT

E

IN

E C BE C

(G)(D)(S)B

IN E OUT

E C B E

C

BE C B

CHIP TR

TOP VIEWBOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEWTRANSISTOR

TOP VIEWBOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEWIC

TOP VIEWCHIP IC

1 N

1 N

1 N

1

NN

N

N

N

1

SEMICONDUCTOR SHAPES

PATTERN DIAGRAMS

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/2) P2-5 P2-7

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (2/2) P2-9 P2-11

CRT SOCKET PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-13

FRONT CONTROL PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-15

AV-29LSAV-29LS-AUAV-29LH

Model

P.W.B. name

AV-29LXAV-29LX-AAV-29LX-AUAV-2908TEE

MAIN PWB PATTERN P2-17

CRT SOCKET PWB PATTERN P2-19

FRONT CONTROL PWB PATTERN P2-20

Model

Patten name

AV-29LSAV-29LS-AUAV-29LH

AV-29LXAV-29LX-AAV-29LX-AUAV-2908TEE

Page 41: AV-29LS

J801VIDEO-1INPUT

T551

FBT

B1

FOCUS2

IC702EEPROM

TU001TUNER

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

IF

IC101VIDEO AMP V01

SCLSDA

COUT1

CRT SOCKET PWB

FRONT CONTROL PWB (2/2)

FRONT CONTROL PWB (1/2)

IC401VERT OUT

J802,J803COMPONENT

(VIDEO-2)INPUT

CB

CR

AUDIO R

J303FRONT IN(VIDEO-3)

VIDEO

AUDIO L/MONO

AUDIO R

J804OUTPUT

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

VOL+

REMOCONRECEIVER

VOL- CH+ CH- MENU

POWERLED

Q522H. OUT

SCREEN

EHV

V

H

DY01DEF YOKE

SPL

SPR

SCL1SDA1

IC301COMBFILTER

CF1036.0 TRAP

BUF

TV/VIDEO

V/Y

SCLSDA

AUDIO L/MONO

VIDEO OUT

SF102FILTER

CF104,1055.5 TRAP6.5 TRAP

CF106TRAP

BUF

SF101FILTER

IC601MULTI SOUNDPROCESSORBUF

IC130PIF/SIF

DETECTOR

BUF

BUFBUF

YOUT1

CB

CR

BUF

BUF

IC602SOUND

PROCESSOR

IC665FILTER

IC650AUDIO AMP

AC INF901

POWER SW

D901RECT

IC97312V REG

T901SW

TRANSF.IC974REG

L951

12V

5V

8V

9V

32V

IC951ERROR

AMP

PC901VOLTAGE

FEEDBACK

IC901POWER

REG

Q136

Q130

CF1416.0 FILTER

CF130FILTER

SCLSDA

SCLSDA

MAIN PWB

SCL,SDA

10

8

7

9,11

3

V1-CV1-Y

V1-V

V1-L

V1-R

V2-Y

IC801VIDEO SW

29,30

V2-L

V2-R4

2

37

36

35

Vout2

Lout2

Rout2

44

43

42

V3-V

L3-L

L3-R

25

27 3

1

MTV-R

MTV-L

15

14

MTV-V13

Lout126

Rout124

Q108

Q111

Q104

Q109

47

48

46

Y

U

V

7 1064

43

42

CIN

CVBS/YIN

62,63

16

14

2,3

IF IN224

IF IN123

SIF IN229

SIF IN128

IC701V/C DEF.

PROCESSOR

5,6

31ROUT

32GOUT

33BOUT

35QSS OUT

21,22VDRB(-)VDRA(+)

33HOUT

38IF VOUT

R

G

B

Q150

2

26,27

30,31

1011Q137

32

1

20

12

AV-29LS,AV-29LH,AV-29LS-AU ONLY

7

12

5

2

L, R

L_VOL, R_VOL

FOCUS1

KEY_IN

REMOTE, LED

S901

IC9723.3V REG

3.3V_STB

J801HEADPHONE

JACK

VM OUTVM

CF1405.5 FILTER

CF1426.5 FILTER BUF

Q132

19Yin1 Vout1

23

AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A,AV-2908TEE, AV-29LX-AU

AV-29LS,AV-29LH,AV-29LS-AU

AV-29LS-AUAV-29LX-AUONLY

2-42-3 No.51839No.51839

BLOCK DIAGRAM

AV-2908TEEAV-29LX

AV-29LHAV-29LSAV-29LX

AV-2908TEEAV-29LSAV-29LH

Page 42: AV-29LS

4.9V

4.3V

4.9V

4.4V

4.9V

5.3V

4.3V5.0V

4.4V4.9V

7.0V

5.9V4.3V

4.3V

4.9V

4.3V

4.3V5.7V

4.9V

4.4V

4.9V4.3V

9.0V

4.4V5.0V

4.2V

4.2V

1.9V

1.7V

4.1V

4.2V

3.4V

4.2V

5.1V

9.0V

3.0V

2.4V

2.6V1.9V

4.2V

1.9V

2.6V 2.6V

2.1V

2.6V

1.7V 2.3V

0.9V4.9V

1.6V

1.4V 0V

1.5V

4.9V

5.0V

0.6V

1.5V 0V

3.1V

0.5V

0V

3.1V

0.6V

0V

4.6V

5.0V

0V

0V-0.3V

0V

-0.4V0V

0V

0.6V

0.6V0V

16.9V

0V

0VV

22.8 0V

0V

11.5V 24V 11.4V0.1V

15.3V

8.3V

7.4V

0V

3.7V

3.7V

3.7V

3.7V

3.7V

0.1V

3.7V

0V

5.0V 0.2V

1.5V

2.4V

2.4V

5.0V

1.9V

1.7V

5.0V

0V0V

2.9V

2.9V

6.3V

2.5V

3.1V

9.0V

0V

4.3V

0V

3.0V

3.9V

9.0V

4.9V

4.3V

4.9V

4.3V

4.3V0V

3.0V

4.3V

3.9V

3.3V

2.7V

3.3V

3.3V

5.0V

5.0V

5.0V 5.0V

0V

5.0V

2.7V

3.3V

3.3V

1.8V

1.6V

3.3V

3.3V

5.0V

3.3V

2.8V

0V 0V

0V 8.3V

4.9V

3.0V

3.8V

0V 4.0V

2.0V

0.7V

0.8V

1.9V

1.9V

3.8V

3.6V

4.6V

1.9V

1.9V

0V

2.1V

4.0V

5.0V 5.0V

0V

1.5V

9.0V

2.2V3.0V

0V

0V3.0V

0V

33.8

V 0V

5.0V

5.0V

1.7V

1.9V 0V

8.6V

4.6V

-1.0V

5.0V

4.8V5.0V

5.0V

3.3V 0V

1.6V

1.5V 0V

3.3V 0V

3.3V

2.8V

2.7V

2.7V

5.1V

2.6V V

2.6V V V

2.4 4.2 1.9

1.5V

3.7V 0V

3.3V

8.3V

3.8V

3.5V

2.0V

2.6V

0.6V 1.4V

9.0V

5.0V4.4V

DIFFERENCE LIST ( PARTS)

NOT USEDNOT USED

SCH-1016A-H2SCH-1015A-H2SCH-1001A-H2

NOT USEDNOT USED

QNZ0454-001QNN0349-001QNN0349-001

IC701

NOT USED75

NOT USEDJ801 R801

NOT USEDNOT USED

NOT USED75 100

NOT USEDR802 R817

NOT USED100 0.1 F

NOT USEDR819 C806 C809

0.01 FTDA9386N12S0432TDA9365N13S0436

TDA9365N13S0436

No.51839 2-5 2-6 No.51839

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

TOFRONT CONTROLPWB CN001

MAIN PWB ASS’Y (1/2)SCH-1001A-H2 (AV-29LS)SCH-1015A-H2 (AV-29LH)SCH-1016A-H2 (AV-29LS-AU)

CP

650

ICP

-N50

-Y

IC601MSP3415D-QG-B3X

TO CRT SOCKETPWB CN00T

NOTE

XBW

: OPTION (NON MOUNT): BUS WIRE: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: MA111-X: DTC124EKA-X: 2SC1740S/QR/-T7

532

IC801 7 IC801 23 IC801 27 IC801 37

1.2Vp-p(H) 2.2Vp-p(H) 2.1Vp-p(H) 2.2Vp-p(H)

IC301 3

1.1Vp-p(H)

IC701 21

IC701 22

1.0Vp-p(V)

1.0Vp-p(V)

IC701 33 IC701 42

IC701 43 IC701 47

IC701 51 IC701 52

IC701 53

2.8Vp-p(H)

0.55Vp-p(H)

3.4Vp-p(H)

3.6Vp-p(H)

1.04Vp-p(H)

1.6Vp-p(H)

2.6Vp-p(H)

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/2) [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LH]

AV-29LHAV-29LSAV-29LS

AV-29LH

R833330

R8451k

R652 2.2k

R653 2.2k

R65022k

R65422k C660

.22

C661.22

C663.22

C74

910

/50

6.8

R115180

390R832

C6

59

.22

R6582.2

R6592.2

QQL244K-6R8Z

C8260.1MY

1/2W

1/2W

OUTPUT

PWB CN00ATO FRONT CONTROL

INPUT(VIDEO-2)COMPONENT

INPUTVIDEO-1

Page 43: AV-29LS

4.9V

4.3V

4.9V

4.4V

4.9V

5.3V

4.3V5.0V

4.4V4.9V

7.0V

5.9V4.3V

4.3V

4.9V

4.3V

4.3V5.7V

4.9V

4.4V

4.9V4.3V

9.0V

4.4V5.0V

4.2V

4.2V

1.9V

1.7V

4.1V

4.2V

3.4V

4.2V

5.1V

9.0V

3.0V

2.4V

2.6V1.9V

4.2V

1.9V

2.6V 2.6V

2.1V

2.6V

1.7V 2.3V

0.9V4.9V

1.6V

1.4V 0V

1.5V

4.9V

5.0V

0.6V

1.5V 0V

3.1V

0.5V

0V

3.1V

0.6V

0V

4.6V

5.0V

0V0V

-0.3V

0V

-0.4V0V

0V

0.6V

0.6V0V

16.9V

0V

0VV

22.8 0V

0V

11.5V 24V 11.4V0.1V

15.3V

2.5V

9.0V

0V

4.3V

0V

3.0V

3.9V

9.0V

4.9V

4.3V

4.9V

4.3V

4.3V0V

3.0V

4.3V

3.9V

3.3V

2.7V

3.3V

3.3V

5.0V

5.0V

5.0V 5.0V

0V

5.0V

2.7V

3.3V

3.3V

1.8V

1.6V

3.3V

3.3V

5.0V

3.3V

2.8V

0V 0V

0V 8.3V

4.9V

3.0V

3.8V

0V 4.0V

2.0V

0.7V

0.8V

1.9V

1.9V

3.8V

3.6V

4.6V

1.9V

1.9V

0V

2.1V

4.0V

5.0V 5.0V

0V

1.5V

9.0V

2.2V3.0V

0V

0V

33.8

V 0V

5.0V

5.0V

1.7V

1.9V 0V

8.6V

4.6V

-1.0V

3.8V

3.5V

2.0V

3.7V

3.3V

8.3V

1.5V

2.6V

2.7V

2.7V

5.1V

3.3V

2.8V

1.6V

1.5V

3.3V

4.8V V5.0 5.0

V

0V

V1.9

0V 0V

V2.6

V2.4

V2.6

V4.2

0V

1.4V0.6V

3.3V

4.4V 5.0V

9.0V

DIFFERENCE LIST ( PARTS)

NOT USED

NOT USED

SCH-1018A-H2

SCH-1017A-H2

SCH-1002A-H2

NOT USED

NOT USED

R801

QNN0349-001

QNZ0454-001

QNN0349-001

NOT USED

NOT USED

NOT USED

75 75

NOT USED

R802

100 100

R817 R819

0.01 F

NOT USED

NOT USED

NOT USED

0.1 F

NOT USED

C809IC701 J801 C806

TDA9365N13S0431

TDA9386N12S0432

TDA9386N12S0432

No.51839No.51839

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/2) [AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU, AV-2908TEE]

2-7 2-8

2.1Vp-p(H)

IC801IC801 IC801

1.2Vp-p(H)

7

2.2Vp-p(H)

23

2.2Vp-p(H)

IC80127 37

IC301

1.1Vp-p(H)

3

1.0Vp-p(V)

IC701 22

1.0Vp-p(V)

IC701 21

3.6Vp-p(H)

IC701 53

3.4Vp-p(H)

IC701 51

0.55Vp-p(H)

IC701 43

2.8Vp-p(H)

IC701 33

2.6Vp-p(H)

IC701 52

1.6Vp-p(H)

IC701 47

1.04Vp-p(H)

IC701 42

: 2SC1740S/QR/-T: DTC124EKA-X

: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X

: OPTION (NON MOUNT)

: MA111-X

: BUS WIRE

57

23

BWX

NOTE

MAIN PWB ASS’Y (1/2)SCH-1002A-H2 (AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A)SCH-1017A-H2 (AV-2908TEE)SCH-1018A-H2 (AV-29LX-AU)

TOFRONT CONTROLPWB CN001

AV-2908TEEAV-29LXAV-29LX

AV-2908TEE

180R115

QQL244K-6R8Z6.8

10/5

0C

749

.22C663

.22C661

.22C660

1kR845

330R833

DAN235K-X

TO CRT SOCKETPWB CN00T

D101

QAX0642-001ZCF130

XCF131

0Y130

R832390

.22

C659

R6592.2D684

X

D6830

R6582.2

1/2W

1/2W

OUTPUT

COMPONENT

INPUT(VIDEO-2)

INPUTVIDEO-1

PWB CN00ATO FRONT CONTROL

Page 44: AV-29LS

2.4V

0V

291V

19.6V

34.1V

11.3V 11.7V

19.8V

3.5V

19.8V 19.4V

19.8V

27.7V 6.7V

27.7V

5.3V3.3V

16.3V

9.1V 9.6V 5.1

V

2.7V

134.2V

26.6V

27.7V

0V

0V

0V

0.6V

9.0V

0V

0.3V

14.4V -13.1V0.9

V

V-15.2

0.3V

14.6V

5.0V

1.7V

1.9V

3.3V

9.0V 2.0V

2.0V 1.9V

6.6V

2.4V

2.5V

16.0V

0.6V

-0.1V

20.6V

0V

134.2V133.8V

0V

0V5.0V

No.51839 No.51839

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (2/2) [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LH]

DEG COIL

TOFRONT CONTROL

MAIN PWB ASS'Y (2/2)

SCH-1001A-H2 (AV-29LS)SCH-1015A-H2 (AV-29LH)SCH-1016A-H2 (AV-29LS-AU)

ISOLATED ( )LIVE ( )

TOCRT

C571X

R571X

Y571X

DEF YOKE

TO CRT SOCKETPWB CN00U

FOR ADJ.CONNECTOR

PWB CN00W

: OPTION (NON MOUNT)BW

NOTE

X: BUS WIRE

1235

: 2SC2412K/QR/-X: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: MA111-X: DTC124EKA-X

Q521 B Q522 B T551 5 T551 4

2Vp-p(H) 2.4Vp-p(H) 150Vp-p(H) 150Vp-p(H)

Q521 C T551 2 T551 9

45Vp-p(H) 8Vp-p(H) 96Vp-p(H)

T551 7

25Vp-p(H)

T551 3

1140Vp-p(H) 90Vp-p(H)

IC401 3 IC401 5

IC401 6 IC401 7

30Vp-p(V) 60Vp-p(V)

20Vp-p(V) 5Vp-p(V)IC401 1

0.7Vp-p(V)

IC401 2

2Vp-p(V)

2-9 2-10

R953

C970

AV-29LHAV-29LS

AV-29LHAV-29LS

1.5KQRE121J-152Y

100/10

C917180p

D954RU30A-F1

C98247/16

L95482 H

R542120k1/2W

Page 45: AV-29LS

2.4V

0V

291V

19.6V

34.1V

11.3V 11.7V

19.8V

3.5V

19.8V 19.4V

19.8V

27.7V 6.7V

27.7V

5.3V3.3V

16.3V

9.1V 9.6V 5.1

V

2.7V

134.2V

26.6V

27.7V

0V

0V

0V

0.6V

9.0V

0V

0.3V

14.4V -13.1V0.9

V

V-15.2

0.3V

14.6V

5.0V

1.7V

1.9V

3.3V

9.0V 2.0V

2.0V 1.9V

6.6V

2.4V

2.5V

16.0V

0.6V

-0.1V

20.6V

0V

134.2V133.8V

0V

0V5.0V

No.51839No.51839 2-11 2-12

ISOLATED ( )LIVE ( )

C571X

R571X

Y571X

: OPTION (NON MOUNT)BW

NOTE

X: BUS WIRE

1235

: 2SC2412K/QR/-X: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: MA111-X: DTC124EKA-X

Q521 B Q522 B T551 5 T551 4

2Vp-p(H) 2.4Vp-p(H) 150Vp-p(H) 150Vp-p(H)

Q521 C T551 2 T551 9

45Vp-p(H) 8Vp-p(H) 96Vp-p(H)

T551 7

25Vp-p(H)

T551 3

1140Vp-p(H) 90Vp-p(H)

IC401 3 IC401 5

IC401 6 IC401 7

30Vp-p(V) 60Vp-p(V)

20Vp-p(V) 5Vp-p(V)IC401 1

0.7Vp-p(V)

IC401 2

2Vp-p(V)

SCH-1002A-H2 (AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A)

SCH-1018A-H2 (AV-29LX-AU)SCH-1017A-H2 (AV-2908TEE)

MAIN PWB ASS'Y (2/2)

MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (2/2) [AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU, AV-2908TEE]

DEG COIL

FRONT CONTROLPWB CN00W

TO

DEF YOKE

CONNECTOR

PWB CN00UTO CRT SOCKET

FOR ADJ.

CRTTO

AV-2908TEEAV-29LXAV-29LX

AV-2908TEE

C917180p

D954RU30A-F1

C98247/16

L95482 H

R542120k1/2W

Page 46: AV-29LS

2.6V12.0V

2.0V

2.7V12.0V

2.0V

2.8V 12.0V

2.1V

3.5V

2.8V

3.3V

2.7V

3.4V

2.7V

3.4V

12.0V

2.7V

3.3V12.0V

2.7V

3.4V12.0V

2.7V

1.5V

2.2V

11.4V

3.3V2.7V

12.0V

4.6V

6.4V

1.6V 1V

7.7V

12.0V

7.0V

7.1V

7.0V 7.0V

0.4V

2.8V 2.7V 2.7V 6.0V

207V

111V 108V

104V

V154.5 -2.5V

-2.2V

22.7V

21.2V

123.7V

64.0V

3.2V

64.0V

2.7V

123V

No.51839 No.51839

CRT SOCKET PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

2-142-13

TOMAIN PWBCN00T

TOMAIN PWBCN00U

CRT SOCKET PWB ASS’YSCH-3001A-H2

AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A,AV-29LX-AU, AV-2908TEE

SK001CE42670-001

W-A1X

W-A2X

Y10

9

BW

R175QRZ9021-1R5

R16

9X

SK001CE42670-001

TOMAIN PWBFBT

NOTE

BWX

: BUS WIRE: OPTION (NON MOUNT)

123789

: 2SC2412K/QR/-X: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: MA111-X: 2SC1740S/QR/-T: 2SA933AS/QR/-T: CE41492-001Z: LOW B GND

: HIGH B GND(H)

3.3Vp-p(H)

3.1Vp-p(H)

2.5Vp-p(H)

IC101 7 IC101 8 IC101 9

150Vp-p(H) 110Vp-p(H) 150Vp-p(H)

CN00TQJB003-083213

AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LH,

AV-2908TEEAV-29LX

AV-29LHAV-29LSAV-29LX

AV-2908TEEAV-29LSAV-29LH

R251

D2010

D2020

Q208X

R218X

R219X R220

X

C208X

C210X

C213560p

C211390p

D203RGP10J-5025-T3

D204RGP10J-5025-T3

8.2kCH

CH

Page 47: AV-29LS

5.5V6.5V7.5V 6.3V7.5V 5.6V5.9V 5.5V 12V

-1.4V

4.1V

0.2V

5.6V

7.6V

0VV

0V5.0

No.51839No.51839

FRONT CONTROL PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

2-15 2-16

TOMAIN PWBCN00W

TODEG COIL

FRONT CONTROL PWB ASS’YSCH-8001A-H2

AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A,AV-29LX-AU, AV-2908TEE

TO MAIN PWB CN001

FRONT INPUT(VIDEO-3)

TOSPEAKER

TOMAIN PWBCN00A

NOTE

XBW

: OPTION (NON MOUNT): BUS WIRE

123

: 2SC2412K/QR/-X: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: MA111-X

AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LH,

AV-2908TEEAV-29LX

AV-29LHAV-29LSAV-29LX

AV-2908TEEAV-29LSAV-29LH

C814BW

R8260

Page 48: AV-29LS

No.51839 No.51839

PATTERN DIAGRAMSMAIN PWB PATTERN

2-182-17

( )

( )

FRONT

B1

AV-2908TEEAV-29LX

AV-29LHAV-29LSAV-29LX

AV-2908TEEAV-29LSAV-29LH

Page 49: AV-29LS

2-19No.51839

[CRT SOCKET PWB PATTERN]

( )

TOP

AV-29LXAV-2908TEE

AV-29LSAV-29LH

Page 50: AV-29LS

[FRONT CONTROL PWB PATTERN]

2-20 No.51839

FRONT CONTROL (1/2)

FRONT CONTROL (2/2)

( )

FRONT

( )

FRONT

AV-2908TEEAV-29LX

AV-29LHAV-29LS

Page 51: AV-29LS

Printed in JapanVP0106SW

AV29LH-H #4AV29LXAU-H #4

AV2908TEE-H #4

AV29LSAU-H #4AV29LXA-H #4

AV29LS-H #4AV29LX-H #4

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITEDHOME AV NETWORK BUSINESS UNIT 12, 3-chome, Moriya-cho, kanagawa-ku, Yokohama, kanagawa-prefecture, 221-8528, Japan

Page 52: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 37

PARTS LIST

CAUTIONq The parts identified by the symbol are important for the safety . Whenever replacing these parts, be sure to use specified ones to secure the

safety .

q The parts not indicated in this Parts List and those which are filled with lines --- in the Parts No. columns will not be supplied .

q P. W. Board Ass'y will not be supplied, but those which are filled with the Parts No. in the Parts No. columns will be supplied .

ABBREVIATIONS OF RESISTORS, CAPACITORS AND TOLERANCES

RESISTORS CAPACITORS

C R Carbon Resistor

F R Fusible Resistor

P R Plate Resistor

V R Variable Resistor

HV R High Voltage Resistor

MF R Metal Film Resistor

MG R Metal Glazed Resistor

MP R Metal Plate Resistor

OM R Metal Oxide Film Resistor

CMF R Coating Metal Film Resistor

UNF R Non-Flammable Resistor

CH V R Chip Variable Resistor

CH MG R Chip Metal Glazed Resistor

COMP. R Composition Resistor

LPTC R Linear Positive Temperature Coefficient Resistor

C CAP. Ceramic Capacitor

E CAP. Electrolytic Capacitor

M CAP. Mylar Capacitor

HV CAP. High Voltage Capacitor

MF CAP. Metalized Film Capacitor

MM CAP. Metalized Mylar Capacitor

MP CAP. Metalized Polystyrol Capacitor

PP CAP. Polypropylene Capacitor

PS CAP. Polystyrol Capacitor

TF CAP. Thin Film Capacitor

MPP CAP. Metalized Polypropylene Capacitor

TAN. CAP. Tantalum Capacitor

CH C CAP. Chip Ceramic Capacitor

BP E CAP. Bi-Polar Electrolytic Capacitor

CH AL E CAP. Chip Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitor

CH AL BP CAP. Chip Aluminum Bi-Polar Capacitor

CH TAN. E CAP. Chip Tantalum Electrolytic Capacitor

CH AL BP E CAP. Chip Tantalum Bi-Polar Electrolytic Capacitor

RESISTORS

F G J K M N R H Z P

±1% ±2% ±5% ±10% ±20% ±30%+30% +50% +80% +100%-10% -10% -20% 0%

Page 53: AV-29LS

38 No. 51839

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

CONTENTSUSING P.W. BOARD & REMOTE CONTROL UNIT ................................................................................. 39EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST-1 ............................................................................................................. 39EXPLODED VIEW-1 .................................................................................................................................. 39EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST-2 ............................................................................................................ 40EXPLODED VIEW-2 ................................................................................................................................. 41

PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST (AV-29LS)MAIN PW BOARD ASS'Y .....................................................................................................................................42CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................45FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y ...............................................................................................................46

DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST BETWEEN AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU AND AV-29LH .........................................48

PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST (AV-29LX)MAIN PW BOARD ASS'Y .....................................................................................................................................49CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................52FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y ...............................................................................................................52

DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST BETWEEN AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU AND AV-2908TEE ............. 53

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTS LIST(AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LH, AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU AND AV-2908TEE) .................. 54

PACKING / PACKING PARTS LIST .....................................................................................................................55

Page 54: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 39

USING P.W. BOARD & REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

MAIN PWB SCH-1001A-H2 SCH-1016A-H2 SCH-1015A-H2CRT SOCKET PWB SCH-3001A-H2FRONT CONTROL PWB SCH-8001A-H2REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-C352-1C RM-C352-1C RM-C353-1C

AV-29LS AV-29LS-AU AV-29LHP.W.B ASS’YModel

MAIN PWB SCH-1002A-H2 SCH-1018A-H2 SCH-1017A-H2CRT SOCKET PWB SCH-3001A-H2FRONT CONTROL PWB SCH-8001A-H2REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-C357-1C RM-C355-1C

AV-29LX AV-29LX-A AV-29LX-AU AV-2908TEEP.W.B ASS’YModel

EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST-1! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

! 1 LC11193-001A-H FRONT CABI ASSY [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU]! 1 LC11193-002A-H FRONT CABI ASSY [AV-29LH]! 1 LC11193-003A-H FRONT CABI ASSY [AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]! 1 LC11193-004A-H FRONT CABI ASSY [AV-2908TEE]

2 LC20776-001B-H DOOR [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU]2 LC20776-002A-H DOOR [AV-29LH]2 LC20776-003A-H DOOR [AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]2 LC20776-004A-H DOOR [AV-2908TEE]

3 CM48229-00A-C DOOR LATCH4 LC20777-001D-H CENTER PLATE5 LC31475-001A-H POWER KNOB6 CM35235-003-H SPRING7 LC20778-001A-H OPERATION SHEET8 LC31474-001A-H CONTROL WINDOW9 LC31476-001B-H LED LENS10 LC41037-001A JVC MARK

EXPLODED VIEW-1

101

!

4

85 6

23

7

9

Page 55: AV-29LS

40 No. 51839

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST-2! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

! V01 A68QCU259X PICTURE TUBE! L01 QQW0113-001 DEG COIL! T1551 QQH0096-001 FBT! 1 QMP40D0-200J5 POWER CORD [AV-29LS, AV-29LX, AV2908TEE]! 1 QMPN050-200-E2 POWER CORD [AV-29LH]! 1 QMP2980-185J5 POWER CORD [AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]! 1 QMPR010-200-E2 POWER CORD [AV-29LX-A]! 2 CM23167-A01-H CORD CLAMP

3 WJY018-001A BRAIDED ASSY4 CHGB0017-0C BRAIDED ASSY (SUB)5 A48457-3-H SPRING6 LC11063-001C-H SP HOLDER (X2)7 QAS0083-001 SPEAKER (X2) SP01, SP028 QYSBSBG4016Z TAPPING SCREW (X8)

! 9 LC10763-004A-HH REAR COVER [AV-29LS, AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-2908TEE]! 9 LC10763-008A-H REAR COVER [AV-29LH, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]

10 QYSBSFG4016Z TAPPING SCREW (X16)! 11 LC20377-001B-H RATING LABEL [AV-29LS]! 11 LC20377-012B-H RATING LABEL [AV-29LH]! 11 LC20377-013B-H RATING LABEL [AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]! 11 LC20377-010B-H RATING LABEL [AV-29LX]! 11 LC20413-002B-H RATING LABEL [AV-29LX-A]! 11 LC20377-009B-H RATING LABEL [AV-2908TEE]

12 CHFD125-18BD-N FFC WIRE

13 LC11064-002A-H AV TERMINAL BOARD [AV-29LS, AV-29LH, AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-2908TEE]13 LC11064-001B-H AV TERMINAL BOARD [AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]14 QYSBSF3012M TAPING SCREW (X4)

! 15 LC11061-001A-H CHASSIS BASE16 LC11062-001C-H CONTROL BASE

Page 56: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 41

EXPLODED VIEW-2

CRT SOCKET PWB

FRONT CONTROL PWB (1/2)

FRONT CONTROL PWB (2/2)

MAIN PWB

FRONT CONTROL PWB (1/2)

FRONT CONTROL PWB (2/2)

MAIN PWB

1

142

8

7

6

9

5

V01

!

!

L01!

3

4

6

12

16

8

7

15!

T1551!

13

11!

!

!

10

Page 57: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-29LS

42 No. 51839

PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST(AV-29LS)MAIN PW BOARD ASS’Y(SCH-1001A-H2)

RESISTORR1001-02 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1003 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1004 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1006 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1101 NRSA63J-100X MG R 10Ø 1/16W JR1102 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1103 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1104 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W J

R1105 NRSA63J-220X MG R 22Ø 1/16W JR1106 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1107 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1108-10 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1111 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1112 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1113 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1114 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W J

R1115 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W JR1117 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1119 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1120 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR1150 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1151 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1152 NRSA63J-121X MG R 120Ø 1/16W JR1153 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W J

R1154 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W JR1301-02 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1303 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1304-05 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1306 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1307 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1308 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1309 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W J

R1310 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1311 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1401 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1403 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1405 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1406 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1408 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1410 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W J

R1411 QRG01GJ-221 OM R 220Ø 1W JR1412 QRE121J-1R0Y C R 1.0Ø 1/2W JR1413 QRX01GJ-1R2 MF R 1.2Ø 1W JR1414 QRE121J-2R7Y C R 2.7Ø 1/2W JR1425 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1478-79 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1480 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1481 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W J

R1482 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1483 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR1484 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1485 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1486 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1487 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1489 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR1490 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R1491 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1492 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1493 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1494 QRL03EJ-330X OM R 33Ø 3W JR1521 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1522 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1523-24 QRL03EJ-151X OM R 150Ø 3W JR1526 QRL029J-271 OM R 270Ø 2W J

R1527 QRL03EJ-103X OM R 10kØ 3W JR1528-29 QRX029J-3R3 MF R 3.3Ø JR1531 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W J

! R1532 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7Ø 1/4W JR1541-42 QRE121J-124Y C R 120kØ 1/2W JR1543 QRE121J-471Y C R 470Ø 1/2W JR1545 QRE121J-220Y C R 22Ø 1/2W JR1546 QRE121J-822Y C R 8.2kØ 1/2W J

RESISTORR1561 QRL02EJ-220X OM R 22Ø 2W JR1562 QRE121J-123Y C R 12kØ 1/2W JR1563 QRZ0056-103Z C R 10kØ 1/2W KR1591 QRA14CF-1202Y MF R 12kØ 1/4W FR1592 QRZ0221-2R2 F R 2.2Ø 1/2W KR1593 NRSA02F-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/10W FR1594 QRE121J-183Y C R 18kØ 1/2W JR1595 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J

R1602 NRSA63J-271X MG R 270Ø 1/16W JR1603-04 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1634-35 QRE141J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/4W JR1650 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1651 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP 1µF ZR1652-53 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2KØ 1/16W JR1654 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1655 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP 1µF Z

R1658-59 QRE121J-2R2Y C R 2.2Ø 1/2W JR1660 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1661 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1662 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1663 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1664 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1665-66 QRE141J-392Y C R 3.9kØ 1/4W JR1667 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1668 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1669 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR1670 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1671 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1672 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR1673-74 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1675 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1676-77 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W J

R1678 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1679 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1680 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1688 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1690 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1691 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1692 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1693 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1696 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1701 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1702-03 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1704-06 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1707-10 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1711-14 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1715-17 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1718-19 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W J

R1720 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1721-24 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1725 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1726 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1727 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1728 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1730 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1731 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R1732 NRSA02F-393X MF R 39kØ FR1733 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1734 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1735 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1736 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1737 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1738 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1739-41 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R1742 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1744 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1745 NRSA63J-105X MG R 1MØ 1/16W JR1746 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1747 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1748 QRE141J-394Y C R 390kØ 1/4W JR1749 QRE141J-334Y C R 330kØ 1/4W JR1755-56 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

Page 58: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

29L

S

AV-29LS

No. 51839 43

RESISTORR1757-58 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1803 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1804-07 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR1808 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR1809 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1810 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR1811 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1812 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W J

R1813 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1815 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1818 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1820 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1821 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1823 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1824 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1826 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R1830-31 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1832 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1833 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1834-35 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1836 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR1837 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1838 QRK126J-121X C R 120Ø 1/2W JR1839-40 QRE121J-221Y C R 220Ø 1/2W J

R1841-42 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1843 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR1844 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1845 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1846 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1847 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1848 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1849 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W J

R1880 NRSA63J-202X MG R 2kØ 1/16W JR1881 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1882 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W JR1883 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR1902 QRF154K-2R2 UNF R 2.2Ø KR1903 QRL039J-473 OM R 47kØ 3W JR1904 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1905 QRM034J-R10 MP R 0.1Ø J

R1908 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1909 QRE121J-274Y C R 270kØ 1/2W JR1911 QRE121J-472Y C R 4.7kØ 1/2W JR1912 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W J

! R1913 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7Ø 1/4W JR1914 QRL039J-473 OM R 47kØ 3W JR1915 QRE121J-394Y C R 390kØ 1/2W JR1916 QRE121J-332Y C R 3.3kØ 1/2W J

R1917 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1918 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1919 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1920 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1921 QRE121J-563Y C R 56kØ 1/2W JR1951 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1952 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1953 QRE121J-152Y C R 1.5kØ 1/2W J

R1955 QRG01GJ-470 OM R 47Ø 1W JR1957 QRE121J-5R6Y C R 5.6Ø 1/2W JR1958 QRL039J-820 OM R 82Ø 3W JR1959 QRE121J-820Y C R 82Ø 1/2W JR1960 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1961 QRL02EJ-223X OM R 22kØ 2W JR1963 QRE121J-332Y C R 3.3kØ 1/2W JR1964 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J

R1965 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1966 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1967 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1969 QRT02EJ-2R7X MF R 2.7Ø 2W JR1970 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1971 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W J

! R1991 QRZ0057-825 C R 8.2MØ 1W J

CAPACITORC1001 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1002 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1003 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1004 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V MC1005 NCB31HK-222X CH C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1006 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1007 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1101-05 NCB31HK-472X C CAP. 4700pF 50V K

C1106-07 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1108 NCB31HK-472X C CAP. 4700pF 50V KC1109 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1150-51 NCB31HK-472X C CAP. 4700pF 50V KC1301-02 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1303-05 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1306 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1307 NDC31HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V J

C1308 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1401 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1402 QCB31HK-682Z C CAP. 6800pF 50V KC1403 QEHR1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1411-12 NCF21HZ-334X C CAP. 0.33µF ZC1413 QFLC2AJ-563Z M CAP. 0.056µF 100V JC1422 QEHR1VM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 35V MC1471 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

C1480 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1483 QEZ0195-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1485 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MC1521 QETN1VM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 35V MC1522 QFLC1HJ-332Z M CAP. 3300pF 50V JC1523 QFLC1HJ-223Z M CAP. 0.022µF 50V JC1524 QFZ0196-382 MPP CAP. 0.0038µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1525 QFZ0200-143 MPP CAP. 0.014µF 1.5kVH ±3%

C1526 QFP32JJ-223 PP CAP. 0.022µF JC1527-28 QFZ0199-224 MPP CAP. 0.22µF 250V JC1529 QENC2AM-225Z BP E CAP. 2.2µF 100V MC1530 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1531 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1532 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1533 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1534 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V K

C1536 QFLC1HJ-103Z M CAP. 0.01µF 50V JC1540 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1541 QETN2EM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 250V MC1550 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1561 QFV71HJ-154Z MF CAP. 0.15µF 50V JC1566 QFZ0200-113 MPP CAP. 0.011µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1591 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V MC1592 QETM2CM-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V M

C1593 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1602 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1603 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1604 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1606-07 NDC31HJ-2R0X C CAP. 2.0pF 50V JC1608-09 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1610 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1611 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V K

C1612 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1613 NCB31CK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1615 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1616 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1617 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1619 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1620 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1621-22 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V K

C1623-24 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1650 QEHR1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1651 QEHR1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1652 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1659-61 NCF21HZ-224X C CAP. 0.22µF 50V ZC1662 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1663 NCF21HZ-224X C CAP. 0.22µF 50V ZC1665 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V K

Page 59: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-29LS

44 No. 51839

CAPACITORC1666-67 NCB31HK-222X CH C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1668-69 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1670 NCB31HK-223X CH C CAP. 0.022µF 50V KC1671 QETN1CM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 16V MC1672 NCB31EK-473X CH C CAP. 0.047µF 25V KC1673 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1674 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1675 NCB31EK-473X CH C CAP. 0.047µF 25V K

C1676 NCB31HK-223X CH C CAP. 0.022µF 50V KC1681-83 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1702 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1703-04 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V JC1705-06 NCB21EK-224X CH C CAP. 0.22µF 25V KC1707 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1709 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1710 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V J

C1711 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1712 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1720 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC1725 NCB31HK-681X C CAP. 680pF 50V KC1730-31 NCB21EK-224X CH C CAP. 0.22µF 25V KC1732 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1733 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1734-35 NCB31HK-222X CH C CAP. 2200pF 50V K

C1736-37 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1738 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1739 NFV41CJ-104X MPPS CAP. 0.1µF 16V JC1740 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC1741-42 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1743 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1744 NCB31HK-222X CH C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1745-47 NCB31EK-473X CH C CAP. 0.047µF 25V K

C1749 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1751-53 NCB21HK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1801-04 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1805 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1807-08 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1810 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1811 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1812 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V Z

C1813 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1814 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1815 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1817 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1819 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1820-21 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1822 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1823-24 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M

C1825 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1826 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1827 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1829-31 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1834 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V J

! C1902 QFZ9073-104 MF CAP. 0.1µFC1903 QCZ9015-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 250V ZC1904 QCZ9015-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z

C1905 QCZ9015-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 250V ZC1907 QEZ0371-337 E CAP. 330µF 400V MC1909 QCZ0325-821 C CAP. 820pF 2000V KC1910 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF 50V JC1911 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC1916 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1917 QCB32HK-181Z C CAP. 180pF 500V KC1918 QCB32HK-103 C CAP. 0.01µF 500V K

C1919 QCZ0325-391 C CAP. 390pF 2000V KC1952 QCB32HK-471Z C CAP. 470pF 500V KC1953 QEHQ1VM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 35V MC1955 QCB32HK-471Z C CAP. 470pF 500V KC1956 QETN1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1957 QCB31HK-471Z C CAP. 470pF 50V KC1958 QEHR1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1959 QCZ0364-561 C CAP. 560pF

CAPACITORC1960 QEZ0203-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V MC1962 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1963 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V MC1964 QETN1CM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 16V MC1965 QETN1VM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 35V MC1966 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1968 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1970 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V M

C1972 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC1974 NCB31CK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1975 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1977 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1978 NCB21HK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1980 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1981 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1982 QETN1CM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 16V M

! C1991 QCZ9079-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V M! C1992-93 QCZ9079-471 C CAP. 470pF 250V K

TRANSFORMERT1521 QQR1229-001 DRIVE TRANSF

! T1551 QQH0096-001 FBTT1561 QQR1153-001 DEF.TRANSF.

! T1901 QQS0110-001 SW TRANSF

COILL1001-02 QQL244K-8R2Z COIL 8.2µH KL1101 QQLZ014-2R2 PEAKING COIL 2.2µHL1102 QQL244K-8R2Z COIL 8.2µH KL1103 QQL244K-6R8Z COIL 6.8µH KL1104 QQL244K-180Z COIL 18µH KL1301 QQL244K-221Z PEAKING COIL 220µH KL1401 QQL26AK-220Z COIL 22µH KL1480 QQR1138-001 CHOKE COIL

L1523 QQR1243-001 LINEARITY COILL1541 QQL244K-220Z PEAKING COIL 22µH ZL1561 QQLZ028-272 CHOKE COIL 2.7mHL1601 QQL244K-4R7Z COIL 4.7µH KL1701-02 QQL244K-100Z COIL 10µH KL1951 QQLZ034-460 HEATER CHOKE 46µHL1953 QQL244J-5R6Z COIL 5.6µH JL1954 QQL26AK-820Z COIL 82µH K

DIODED1101 DAN235K-X SI.DIODED1401 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1402 MTZJ75-T2 ZENER DIODED1405 1N4003-T2 SI.DIODED1408 MA111-X SI.DIODED1480 MTZJ4.3A-T2 ZENER DIODED1521 RH3G-F1 SI.DIODED1522 31DF6N-FC5 DIODE

D1523 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1541 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1550 MA111-X SI.DIODED1551 EU2-T3 SI.DIODED1553 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1554 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1592 MA3075/H/-X ZENER DIODED1652-53 MA3330/L/-X ZENER DIODE

D1682 MA111-X SI.DIODED1683 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JD1702 MA3020-X ZENER DIODED1703 MTZJ4.7A-T2 ZENER DIODED1730-33 MA111-X SI.DIODED1901 GSIB460 BRIDGE DIODED1902 MTZJ33B-T2 ZENER DIODED1903 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

D1906 MTZJ27B-T2 ZENER DIODED1907 MTZJ33B-T2 ZENER DIODE

Page 60: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

29L

S

AV-29LS

No. 51839 45

DIODED1908 MA3200/M/-X ZENER DIODED1909 MA111-X SI.DIODED1910 MA3075/H/-X ZENER DIODED1911 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1912 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1913 RGP10M-5010-T3 SI DIODED1914 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1915 MA3068/M/-X ZENER DIODE

D1916 MTZJ15B-T2 ZENER DIODED1950 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1952 ERC30-02L38 SI.DIODED1953 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1954 RU30A-F1 SI.DIODED1955 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1956 31DF6N-FC5 DIODED1958 MTZJ5.1A-T2 ZENER DIODE

D1960 MA111-X SI.DIODED1964 MA3330/L/-X ZENER DIODED1966 MA3039/H/-X ZENER DIODED1968-69 MA111-X SI.DIODED1970 MTZJ9.1B-T2 ZENER DIODED1971 MA111-X SI.DIODE

TRANSISTORQ1101 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1102-03 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1104 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1105-06 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1107 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1108 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1109 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1110 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR

Q1111 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1150 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1301-02 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1303 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1304 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1480 2SD1408/OY/-LB SI.TRANSISTORQ1521 2SC2655/Y/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1522 2SD2634-YD SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1591 2SA1208/ST/Z1-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1592 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1660-61 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1683-84 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1685-86 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1687 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1701-02 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1703 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1720 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1801-02 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1803 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1804 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1833 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MQ1860 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1861-62 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1901 2SC3852A SI TRANSISTOR

Q1902-03 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1951 2SA1013/RO/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1952-54 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC1301 TDA9181T/N1-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1401 LA78041 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1461 JLC1562BF-X I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC1480 UPC358G2-XE I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1601 MSP3415D-QG-B3X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1650 AN5277 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1665 BA4558F-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1701 TDA9365N13S0436 I.C

IC1702 BR24C08-29LS I.C(MEMORY-OTH) (SERVICE)IC1801 MM1492AF I.C

ICIC1901 STR-F6456S/F7 I.C(HYBRID)IC1951 SE135N I.C(HYBRID)IC1972 L88M33T-X I.CIC1973 BA17812T I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1974 BA51W12ST-V5 I.C(MONO-ANA)

OTHERSCF1103 TPSH6.0MB CERAMIC FILTERCF1104 TPS5.5MW CERAMIC FILTERCF1105 TPS6.5MB CERAMIC FILTERCF1106 QAX0639-001Z CERAMIC FILTER

! CP1650 ICP-N50-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1951 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1953 ICP-N38-Y I.C.PROTECT

J1801 QNN0349-001 PIN JACK

J1802 QNN0349-002 PIN JACKJ1803 QNN0348-001 PIN JACKJ1804 QNN0349-001 PIN JACKK1301 CE41433-001Z BEADS COREK1903 QQR1214-001Y FERRITE BEADSK1904 CE42050-001Z COREK1951 QQR1214-001Y FERRITE BEADSK1953-55 QQR1214-001Y FERRITE BEADS

LC1601 CE42482-103Y EMI FILTER! LF1901 QQR1035-002 LINE FILTER! PC1901 PC123F2 I.C(PH.COUPLER)! RY1901 QSK0061-001 RELAY

SF1102 QAX0594-001 SAW FILTERTH1901 QAD0134-4R5 W-PTCTU1001 QAU0185-003 TUNERX1601 CE42546-001Z CRYSTAL

X1701 QAX0688-001 X TAL

CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y(SCH-3001A-H2)

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

RESISTORR3101 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR3102 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3103 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR3104 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR3105 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3106 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR3107 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR3108 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R3109 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR3125 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR3126 QRE121J-393Y C R 39kØ 1/2W JR3142 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR3150 QRZ0107-152Z C R 1.5kØ 1/2W KR3152 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR3160 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR3166 QRZ0107-152Z C R 1.5kØ 1/2W K

R3170 QRZ0107-474Z C R 470kØ 1/2W KR3171 QRZ0107-152Z C R 1.5kØ 1/2W KR3172 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

! R3175 QRZ9021-1R5 F R 1.5Ø 1W JR3176 QRE121J-123Y C R 12kØ 1/2W JR3211 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR3212 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR3213 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J

R3214 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR3215 NRSA63J-680X MG R 68Ø 1/16W JR3216 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W J

! R3217 QRJ146J-100X C R 10Ø 1/4W JR3221-22 NRSA63J-470X MG R 47Ø 1/16W JR3224 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR3225-26 QRE121J-563Y C R 56kØ 1/2W JR3227 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W J

Page 61: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-29LS

46 No. 51839

RESISTORR3228 NRSA63J-390X MG R 39Ø 1/16W JR3229-30 QRE121J-2R7Y C R 2.7Ø 1/2W JR3231 NRSA63J-390X MG R 39Ø 1/16W JR3232 QRE121J-121Y C R 120Ø 1/2W JR3233 QRL029J-391 OM R 390Ø 2W JR3251 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR3252 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR3253 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R3254 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR3255 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR3256 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR3257 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3258 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR3259 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3260 NRSA63J-271X MG R 270Ø 1/16W JR3261-63 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R3264 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR3265 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3266 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR3267 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3268 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR3269 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3270 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR3271 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R3272 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR3273 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3274 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR3275 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

CAPACITORC3101 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V MC3102 QFK62EK-104Z MM CAP. 0.1µF 250V KC3107 QETM2EM-336 E CAP. 33µF 250V MC3109 QCZ0131-472 C CAP. 4700pF 2000V KC3110 QCZ0131-222 C CAP. 2200pF 2000V KC3113 QCB31HK-222Z C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC3121 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC3122 QETN2EM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 250V M

C3204 NDC31HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC3205 QETN1HM-335Z E CAP. 3.3µF 50V MC3206 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC3209 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC3211 NDC31HJ-391X C CAP. 390pF 50V JC3212 QCB32HK-472Z C CAP. 4700pF 500V KC3213 NDC31HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC3214 QETN2CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 160V M

C3215 QCB32HK-472Z C CAP. 4700pF 500V KC3216 QETN2CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 160V MC3217-18 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V MC3219 QETN1AM-337Z E CAP. 330µF 10V MC3251 QENC1HM-105Z BP E CAP. 1µF 50V MC3252 NDC31HJ-151X C CAP. 150pF 50V JC3253 NDC31HJ-560X C CAP. 56pF 50V JC3255 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC3264-66 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V M

COILL3121 QQL244J-5R6Z COIL 5.6µH JL3251 QQL244K-150Z COIL 15µH K

DIODED3108 MA3075/H/-X ZENER DIODED3109 MA3051/H/-X ZENER DIODED3110 MA111-X SI.DIODED3111 MA3051/H/-X ZENER DIODED3112 MA111-X SI.DIODED3113 MA3051/H/-X ZENER DIODED3114 MA111-X SI.DIODED3115-17 EU01N-T2 SI.DIODE

D3121-23 1N4003-T2 SI.DIODE

DIODED3124 MA111-X SI.DIODED3125 MTZJ75-T2 ZENER DIODED3201-02 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JD3203 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED3204 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODE

TRANSISTORQ3101-03 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ3121 2SC4212/Z1/ SI.TRANSISTORQ3122 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ3204-05 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3206 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3209 2SA1964/DE/ SI.TRANSISTORQ3210 2SC5248/DE/ SI.TRANSISTORQ3251 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ3252 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

Q3253 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ3261-63 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ3264-66 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC3101 TDA6107Q/N2 I C

OTHERSDL3261-63 CE41925-001 DELAY LINE

! FR3201 QRZ9021-561 F R 560Ø 1W JK3201-04 CE41492-001Z CHOKE COILSG3101-03 QAF0006-501 SPARK GAP

! SK3001 CE42670-001 C.R.T.SOCKET

FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y(SCH-8001A-H2)

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

RESISTORR8482 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR8483 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR8484-85 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR8486 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR8487 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR8488 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR8489 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR8491-92 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J

R8495 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR8497 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR8801 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR8802 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR8803 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR8805 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR8807 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W JR8808 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W J

R8809 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR8810 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR8811 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR8812 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR8813 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR8814 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR8815-16 QRE121J-271Y C R 270Ø 1/2W JR8817-18 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J

R8819 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR8826 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR8830-31 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J

! R8901 QRZ0111-474 C R 470kØ

Page 62: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

29L

S

AV-29LS

No. 51839 47

CAPACITORC8481-84 NCB21EK-224X C CAP. 0.22µF 25V KC8485 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC8660-61 QETM1VM-108 E CAP. 1000µF 35V MC8801 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC8802 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC8803 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC8815 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M

! C8901 QFZ9073-224 MF CAP. 0.22µF

DIODED8601-02 MTZJ75-T2 ZENER DIODED8801 MA111-X SI.DIODED8802 P1241-04 C.D.S.D8803 SLR-342VR-T16 L.E.D.

TRANSISTORQ8481 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ8801 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC8481 LA6515 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC8801 GP1U281Q IFR DETECT UNIT

OTHERSCM35921-005-H CDS HOLDERCM36626-B01-H L.E.D.HOLDER

! LF8901 QQR1035-002 LINE FILTER! F8901 QMF51E2-4R0J4 FUSE

FC8901 CEMG002-001Z FUSE CLIPJ8302 QNN0279-003 PIN JACKJ8303 QNN0279-002 PIN JACKJ8304 QNN0279-001 PIN JACK

J8801 QNS0155-001 JACKS8801 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH CH+S8802 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH CH-S8803 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH MENUS8804 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH TV/VIDEOS8805 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH VOL+S8806 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH VOL-

! S8901 QSW0750-001 PUSH SWITCH POWER

! VA8901 QAF0052-621 VARISTOR

Page 63: AV-29LS

AV-29LSAV-29LH

48 No. 51839

DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST

DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST BETWEEN AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU AND AV-29LH

In the DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST BETWEEN AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU and AV-29LH, only difference points betweenthese models are written. For other parts not mentioned in the list, please refer to the PARTS LIST(P42 – P45) for theAV-29LS.

SymbolNo.

! Part NameAV-29LS AV-29LS-AU AV-29LH

SCH-1001A-H2 SCH-1016A-H2 SCH-1015A-H2 MAIN PWB

IC701 TDA9365N13S0436 TDA9386N12S0432 IC

R1801 — NRSA63J-750X (75Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

R1802 — NRSA63J-750X (75Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

R1817 — NRSA63J-101X (100Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

R1819 — NRSA63J-101X (100Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

C1806 — QFLC1HJ-104Z (0.1µF, 50V, J) — M CAP.

C1809 — NCB31HK-103X (0.01µF, 50V, K) — C CAP.

J1801 QNN0349-001 QNZ0454-001 QNN0349-001 PIN JACK

---------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Part No.

Page 64: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

29L

X

AV-29LX

No. 51839 49

PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIS(AV-29LX)MAIN PW BOARD ASS’Y(SCH-1002A-H2)

RESISTORR1001-02 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1003 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1004 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1006 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1101 NRSA63J-100X MG R 10Ø 1/16W JR1102 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1103 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1104 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W J

R1105 NRSA63J-220X MG R 22Ø 1/16W JR1106 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1107 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1108-09 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1111 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1112 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1113 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1114 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W J

R1115 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W JR1117 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1119 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1120 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR1130 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1131 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR1132 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1133 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W J

R1134 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1135 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1136 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1137 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1138 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1139 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1140 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR1141 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W J

R1142 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1143 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR1144 NRSA63J-220X MG R 22Ø 1/16W JR1145 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR1146 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1147 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1148 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1149 QRE141J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/4W J

R1301-02 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1303 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1304-05 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1306 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1307 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1308 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1309 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1310 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J

R1311 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1401 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1403 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1405 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1406 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1408 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1410 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1411 QRG01GJ-221 OM R 220Ø 1W J

R1412 QRE121J-1R0Y C R 1.0Ø 1/2W JR1413 QRX01GJ-1R2 MF R 1.2Ø 1W JR1414 QRE121J-2R7Y C R 2.7Ø 1/2W JR1425 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1478-79 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1480 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1481 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1482 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W J

R1483 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR1484 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1485 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1486 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1487 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1489 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR1490 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1491 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W J

RESISTORR1492 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1493 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1494 QRL03EJ-330X OM R 33Ø 3W JR1521 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1522 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1523-24 QRL03EJ-151X OM R 150Ø 3W JR1526 QRL029J-271 OM R 270Ø 2W JR1527 QRL03EJ-103X OM R 10kØ 3W J

R1528-9 QRX029J-3R3 MF R 3.3Ø JR1531 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W J

! R1532 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7Ø 1/4W JR1541-42 QRE121J-124Y C R 120kØ 1/2W JR1543 QRE121J-471Y C R 470Ø 1/2W JR1545 QRE121J-220Y C R 22Ø 1/2W JR1546 QRE121J-822Y C R 8.2kØ 1/2W JR1561 QRL02EJ-220X OM R 22Ø 2W J

R1562 QRE121J-123Y C R 12kØ 1/2W JR1563 QRZ0056-103Z COMP.R 10kØ 1/2W KR1591 QRA14CF-1202Y MF R 12kØ 1/4W FR1592 QRZ0221-2R2 UNF R 2.2Ø

R1593 NRSA02F-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/10W FR1594 QRE121J-183Y C R 18kØ 1/2W JR1595 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1621-22 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R1626 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1627 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1628 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1629 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1630 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1631 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1632-33 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1650-51 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W J

R1654-55 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1658-59 QRE121J-2R2y C R 2.2Ø 1/2W JR1660 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1661 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1662 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1663 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1664 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1688 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W J

R1690 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1692 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1693 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1694 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1695 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR1696 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1701 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1702-03 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J

R1704-05 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1706 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1707-10 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1711-14 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1715-17 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1718-19 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1720 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1721-24 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W J

R1726 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1727 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1728 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1730 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1731 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1732 NRSA02F-393X MF R 39kØ FR1733 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1734 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W J

R1735 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1736 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1737 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1738 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1739-41 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1742 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1744 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1745 NRSA63J-105X MG R 1MØ 1/16W J

Page 65: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-29LX

50 No. 51839

RESISTORR1746 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1747 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1748 QRE141J-394Y C R 390kØ 1/4W JR1749 QRE141J-334Y C R 330kØ 1/4W JR1755-56 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1757-58 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1803 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1804-07 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W J

R1808 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR1809 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1810 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR1811 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1812 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1813 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1815 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1818 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J

R1820 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1821 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1823 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1824 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1826 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1830-31 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1832 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1833 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J

R1834-35 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1836 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR1837 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1838 QRK126J-121X C R 120Ø 1/2W JR1839-40 QRE121J-221Y C R 220Ø 1/2W JR1841-42 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1843 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR1844 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J

R1845 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1846 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1847 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1848 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1849 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR1880 NRSA63J-202X MG R 2kØ 1/16W JR1881 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1882 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W J

R1883 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR1902 QRF154K-2R2 UNF R 2.2Ø KR1903 QRL039J-473 OM R 47kØ 3W JR1904 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1905 QRM034J-R10 MP R 0.1Ø JR1908 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1909 QRE121J-274Y C R 270kØ 1/2W JR1911 QRE121J-472Y C R 4.7kØ 1/2W J

R1912 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W J! R1913 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7Ø 1/4W J

R1914 QRL039J-473 OM R 47kØ 3W JR1915 QRE121J-394Y C R 390kØ 1/2W JR1916 QRE121J-332Y C R 3.3kØ 1/2W JR1917 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1918 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1919 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W J

R1920 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1921 QRE121J-563Y C R 56kØ 1/2W JR1951 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1952 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1953 QRE121J-152Y C R 1.5kØ 1/2W JR1955 QRG01GJ-470 OM R 47Ø 1W JR1957 QRE121J-5R6Y C R 5.6Ø 1/2W JR1958 QRL039J-820 OM R 82Ø 3W J

R1959 QRE121J-820Y C R 82Ø 1/2W JR1960 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR1961 QRL02EJ-223X OM R 22kØ 2W JR1963 QRE121J-332Y C R 3.3kØ 1/2W JR1964 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1965 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1966 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1967 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J

RESISTORR1969 QRT02EJ-2R7X MF R 2.7Ø 2W JR1970 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1971 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W J

! R1991 QRZ0057-825 C R 8.2MØ 1W J

CAPACITORC1001 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1002 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1003 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1004 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V MC1005 NCB31HK-222X CH C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1006 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1007 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1101-05 NCB31HK-472X C CAP. 4700pF 50V K

C1106-07 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1109 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1130-32 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1133 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1134 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1135 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1136-38 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1140-42 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K

C1143 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1144 NCB31HK-223X CH C CAP. 0.022µF 50V KC1301-02 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1303-05 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1306 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1307 NDC31HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V JC1308 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1401 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M

C1402 QCB31HK-682Z C CAP. 6800pF 50V KC1403 QEHR1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1411-12 NCF21HZ-334X C CAP. 0.33µF ZC1413 QFLC2AJ-563Z M CAP. 0.056µF 100V JC1422 QEHR1VM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 35V MC1471 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1480 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1483 QEZ0195-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V M

C1485 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MC1521 QETN1VM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 35V MC1522 QFLC1HJ-332Z M CAP. 3300pF 50V JC1523 QFLC1HJ-223Z M CAP. 0.022µF 50V JC1524 QFZ0196-382 MPP CAP. 3800pF 1.5kVH ±3%C1525 QFZ0200-143 MPP CAP. 0.014µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1526 QFP32JJ-223 PP CAP. 0.022µF JC1527-28 QFZ0199-224 MPP CAP. 0.22µF 250V J

C1529 QENC2AM-225Z BP E CAP. 2.2µF 100V MC1530 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1531 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1532 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1533 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1534 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1536 QFLC1HJ-103Z M CAP. 0.01µF 50V JC1540 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V J

C1541 QETN2EM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 250V MC1550 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1561 QFV71HJ-154Z MF CAP. 0.15µF 50V JC1566 QFZ0200-113 MPP CAP. 0.011µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1591 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V MC1592 QETM2CM-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V MC1593 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1625 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

C1626 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1629 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1630 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF JC1631 NCB31EK-333X CH C CAP. 0.033µF 25V KC1634 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1636-37 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1638 NCB31EK-333X CH C CAP. 0.033µF 25V KC1639 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF J

C1640 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1641 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M

Page 66: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-

29L

X

AV-29LX

No. 51839 51

CAPACITORC1642 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1643 NCB31HK-562X CH C CAP. 5600pF 50V KC1644 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1645-46 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1647 NCB31EK-393X CH C CAP. 0.039µF 25V KC1648 NCB31HK-223X CH C CAP. 0.022µF 50V KC1650 QEHR1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1651 QEHR1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V M

C1652 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1659-61 NCF21HZ-224X C CAP. 0.22µF 50V ZC1662 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1663 NCF21HZ-224X C CAP. 0.22µF 50V ZC1665 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1669 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1681-83 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1684 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

C1702 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1703-04 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V JC1705-06 NCB21EK-224X CH C CAP. 0.22µF 25V KC1707 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1709 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1710 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1711 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1712 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M

C1720 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC1725 NCB31HK-681X C CAP. 680pF 50V KC1730-31 NCB21EK-224X CH C CAP. 0.22µF 25V KC1732 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1733 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1734-35 NCB31HK-222X CH C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1736-37 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1738 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V K

C1739 NFV41CJ-104X MPP CAP. 0.1µF 16V JC1740 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC1741-42 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1743 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1744 NCB31HK-222X CH C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1745-47 NCB31EK-473X CH C CAP. 0.047µF 25V KC1749 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1751-53 NCB21HK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 50V K

C1801-04 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1805 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1807-08 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1810 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1811 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1812 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1813 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1814 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V J

C1815 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1817 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1819 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1820-21 NCF31AZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 10V ZC1822 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1823-24 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1825 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1826 QFLC1HJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 50V J

C1827 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1829-31 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1834 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V J

! C1902 QFZ9073-104 MF CAP. 0.1µFC1903-05 QCZ9015-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 250V ZC1907 QEZ0371-337 E CAP. 330µF 400V MC1909 QCZ0325-821 C CAP. 820pF 2000V KC1910 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF 50V J

C1911 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC1916 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1917 QCB32HK-181Z C CAP. 180pF 500V KC1918 QCB32HK-103 C CAP. 0.01µF 500V KC1919 QCZ0325-391 C CAP. 390pF 2000V KC1952 QCB32HK-471Z C CAP. 470pF 500V KC1953 QEHQ1VM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 35V MC1955 QCB32HK-471Z C CAP. 470pF 500V K

CAPACITORC1956 QETN1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1957 QCB31HK-471Z C CAP. 470pF 50V KC1958 QEHR1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1959 QCZ0364-561 C CAP. 560pFC1960 QEZ0203-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V MC1962 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1963 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V MC1964 QETN1CM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 16V M

C1965 QETN1VM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 35V MC1966 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1968 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1970 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V MC1972 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC1974 NCB31CK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 16V KC1975 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1977 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V M

C1978 NCB21HK-104X CH C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1980 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1981 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1982 QETN1CM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 16V M

! C1991 QCZ9079-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V M! C1992-93 QCZ9079-471 C CAP. 4700pF 250V M

TRANSFORMERT1521 QQR1229-001 DRIVE TRANSF

! T1551 QQH0096-001 FBTT1561 QQR1153-001 DEF.TRANSF.

! T1901 QQS0110-001 SW TRANSF

COILL1001-02 QQL244K-8R2Z COIL 8.2µH KL1101 QQLZ014-2R2 PEAKING COIL 2.2µHL1102 QQL244K-8R2Z COIL 8.2µH KL1103 QQL244K-6R8Z COIL 6.8µH KL1104 QQL244K-180Z COIL 18µH KL1301 QQL244K-221Z PEAKING COIL 220µH KL1401 QQL26AK-220Z COIL 22µH KL1480 QQR1138-001 CHOKE COIL

L1523 QQR1243-001 LINEARITY COILL1541 QQL244K-220Z PEAKING COIL 22µH KL1561 QQLZ028-272 CHOKE COIL 2.7mHL1701-02 QQL244K-100Z COIL 10µH KL1951 QQLZ034-460 HEATER CHOKE 46µHL1953 QQL244J-5R6Z COIL 5.6µH JL1954 QQL26AK-820Z COIL 82µH K

DIODED1101 1SS85-T2 SI.DIODED1401 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1402 MTZJ75-T2 ZENER DIODED1405 1N4003-T2 SI.DIODED1408 MA111-X SI.DIODED1480 MTZJ4.3A-T2 ZENER DIODED1521 RH3G-F1 SI.DIODED1522 31DF6N-FC5 DIODE

D1523 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1541 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1550 MA111-X SI.DIODED1551 EU2-T3 SI.DIODED1553 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1554 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1592 MA3075/H/-X ZENER DIODED1652-53 MA3330/L/-X ZENER DIODE

D1682 MA111-X SI.DIODED1683 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JD1702 MA3020-X ZENER DIODED1703 MTZJ4.7A-T2 ZENER DIODED1730-33 MA111-X SI.DIODED1901 GSIB460 BRIDGE DIODED1902 MTZJ33B-T2 ZENER DIODED1903 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE

Page 67: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

AV-29LX

52 No. 51839

DIODED1906 MTZJ27B-T2 ZENER DIODED1907 MTZJ33B-T2 ZENER DIODED1908 MA3200/M/-X ZENER DIODED1909 MA111-X SI.DIODED1910 MA3075/H/-X ZENER DIODED1911 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1912 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1913 RGP10M-5010-T3 SI DIODE

D1914 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1915 MA3068/M/-X ZENER DIODED1916 MTZJ15B-T2 ZENER DIODED1950 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1952 ERC30-02L38 SI.DIODED1953 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1954 RU30A-F1 SI.DIODED1955 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODE

D1956 31DF6N-FC5 DIODED1958 MTZJ5.1A-T2 ZENER DIODED1960 MA111-X SI.DIODED1964 MA3330/L/-X ZENER DIODED1966 MA3039/H/-X ZENER DIODED1968-69 MA111-X SI.DIODED1970 MTZJ9.1B-T2 ZENER DIODED1971 MA111-X SI.DIODE

TRANSISTORQ1101 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1102 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1104 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1105-06 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1107 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1108 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1109 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1110 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR

Q1111 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1130 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1131 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1132 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1133 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1134-35 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1136-37 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1301-02 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1303 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1304 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1480 2SD1408/OY/-LB SI.TRANSISTORQ1521 2SC2655/Y/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1522 2SD2634-YD SI.TRANSISTORQ1591 2SA1208/ST/Z1-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1592 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1660-61 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR

Q1683-84 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1685-86 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1687 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1688 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1701-02 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1703 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1720 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1801-02 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR

Q1803 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1804 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1833 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MQ1860 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1861-62 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1901 2SC3852A SI TRANSISTORQ1902-03 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1951 2SA1013/RO/-T SI.TRANSISTOR

ICIC1130 M52342SP I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1301 TDA9181T/N1-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1401 LA78041 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1461 JLC1562BF-X I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC1480 UPC358G2-XE I.C(MONO-ANA)

ICIC1602 BH3865S I.CIC1650 AN5277 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1701 TDA9386N12S0432 I.CIC1702 BR24C08-29LS I.C(MEMORY-OTH) (SERVICE)IC1801 MM1492AF I.CIC1901 STR-F6456S/F7 I.C(HYBRID)IC1951 SE135N I.C(HYBRID)IC1972 L88M33T-X I.C

IC1973 BA17812T I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1974 BA51W12ST-V5 I.C(MONO-ANA)

OTHERSCF1103 TPSH6.0MB CERAMIC FILTERCF1104 TPS5.5MW CERAMIC FILTERCF1105 TPS6.5MB CERAMIC FILTERCF1106 QAX0639-001Z CERAMIC FILTERCF1130 QAX0642-001Z CERAMIC FILTERCF1140 QAX0336-001 CERAMIC FILTERCF1141 QAX0337-001 CERAMIC FILTERCF1142 QAX0338-001 CERAMIC FILTER

! CP1650 ICP-N50-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1951 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1953 ICP-N38-Y I.C.PROTECT

J1801 QNN0349-001 PIN JACKJ1802 QNN0349-002 PIN JACKJ1803 QNN0348-001 PIN JACKJ1804 QNN0349-001 PIN JACKK1301 CE41433-001Z BEADS CORE

K1903 QQR1214-001Y FERRITE BEADSK1904 CE42050-001Z COREK1951 QQR1214-001Y FERRITE BEADSK1953-55 QQR1214-001Y FERRITE BEADS

! LF1901 QQR1035-002 LINE FILTER! PC1901 PC123F2 I.C(PH.COUPLER)! RY1901 QSK0061-001 RELAY

SF1101 QAX0325-001 SAW FILTER

SF1102 QAX0594-001 SAW FILTERTH1901 QAD0134-4R5 W-PTCTU1001 QAU0185-003 TUNERX1701 QAX0688-001 X TAL

CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y(SCH-3001A-H2)Parts list is the same as for AV-29LS. Refer to page 45 .

FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y(SCH-8001A-H2)Parts list is the same as for AV-29LS. Refer to page 46.

Page 68: AV-29LS

AV-29LXAV-2908TEE

No. 51839 53

Part No.

AV-29LX AV-29LX-A AV-29LX-AU AV-2908TEE

DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST

DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST BETWEEN AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU AND AV-2908TEE

In the DIFFERENCE PARTS LIST BETWEEN AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU and AV-2908TEE, only differencepoints between these models are written. For other parts not mentioned in the list, please refer to the PARTS LIST(P49– P52) for the AV-29LX.

SymbolNo.

! Part Name

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -SCH-1002A-H2 SCH-1018A-H2 SCH-1017A-H2 MAIN PWB

IC1701 TDA9386N12S0432 TDA9365N13S0431 IC

R1801 — — NRSA63J-750X (75Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

R1802 — — NRSA63J-750X (75Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

R1817 — — NRSA63J-101X (100Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

R1819 — — NRSA63J-101X (100Ø, 1/16W, J) — MG R

C1806 — — QFLC1HJ-104Z (0.1µF, 50V, J) — M CAP.

C1809 — — NCB31HK-103X (0.01µF, 50V, K) — C CAP.

J1801 QNN0349-001 QNZ0454-001 QNN0349-001 PIN JACK

Page 69: AV-29LS

! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

54 No. 51839

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTS LISTRM-C352-1C [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU]RM-C353-1C [AV-29LH]RM-C357-1C [AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]RM-C355-1C [AV-2908TEE]

! Ref. No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

31392340128 BATTERY COVER

Page 70: AV-29LS

AV-29LS AV-29LXAV-29LH AV-2908TEE

No. 51839 55

PACKING

PACKING PARTS LIST! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local

1 CP30967-004-H POLY BAG2 GG10044-022A-H P CASE3 LC11066-002A-H CUSHION ASSY4 RM-C352-1C RC HAND UNIT [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU]4 RM-C353-1C RC HAND UNIT [AV-29LH]4 RM-C357-1C RC HAND UNIT [AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]4 RM-C355-1C RC HAND UNIT [AV-2908TEE]5 GG20012-001A-H CORNER LABEL

6 CP30966-001-H POLY BAG! 7 LCT0935-001A-H INST BOOK [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]! 7 LCT1006-001A-H INST BOOK [AV-29LH]! 7 LCT1007-001A-H INST BOOK [AV2908TEE]

8 BT-56001-2 WARRANTY CARD [AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]8 BT-54012-2 WARRANTY CARD [AV-2908TEE]9 BT-56002-2 S CENTER LIST [AV-29LS-AU, AV-29LX-AU]10 LCT0937-001A-H DIGEST MANUAL [AV-29LX, AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]

11 QAM0055-001 CONVERSION PLUG [AV-29LX-A, AV-29LX-AU]12 LC1057-001A-H INST SHEET [AV-29LS, AV-29LS-AU]13 LC1058-001A-H INST SHEET [AV-2908TEE]

7!

8 9

11 12 13

106

2

4

3

1

3

5 5

3

3

Page 71: AV-29LS

LCT0935-001A-H0401-Ki-NV-JMT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

COLOUR TELEVISION

INSTRUCTIONSThank you for buying this JVCcolour television.To make sure you understand how touse your new TV, please read thismanual thoroughly before you begin.

LS series:AV-21LSAV-25LSAV-29LSAV-34LS

LX series:AV-21LXAV-25LXAV-29LXAV-34LX

LXB series:AV-21LXBAV-25LXBAV-29LXB

Contents

Safety precautions 2Preparation 3

1 Confirm which remote control you have ... 32 Insert the batteries into the remote control ... 33 Connecting the aerial and VCR .................. 44 Connecting other devices .......................... 55 Connect the power cord to the AC outlet ... 56 Initial setting ............................................... 6

Basic operation 7Remote control buttons and functions 8

ECO SENSOR button ..................................... 8PICTURE MODE button ................................. 8COLOUR SYSTEM button ............................. 8SOUND SYSTEM button ............................... 8

button ............................................. 9SUPER BASS button ..................................... 9MUTING button ............................................. 9DISPLAY button ............................................. 9OFF TIMER button ......................................... 9RETURN + button ........................................ 10CHANNEL SCAN button .............................. 10

Viewing teletext programmes 11, 12Using the TV’s menus 13

Basic operation ............................................ 13INPUT ........................................................... 14PICTURE TILT ............................................... 14VNR ............................................................... 14COMPRESS (16:9) ........................................ 14AUTO SHUTOFF .......................................... 15CHILD LOCK ................................................. 15BLUE BACK .................................................. 15VIDEO-2 SET ................................................ 16Picture Adjustments .................................... 16Sound Adjustments ..................................... 16MONO SURROUND ..................................... 17AI VOLUME .................................................. 17AUTO CH PRESET ....................................... 17MANUAL CH PRESET .................................. 18SKIP .............................................................. 19LANGUAGE .................................................. 19

Attaching the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit 20TV buttons and parts 21Using the buttons on the TV 22Troubleshooting 23Specifications Back cover

LCT0935 Cover 01.5.11, 6:02 PM3

Black

Page 72: AV-29LS

2

Safety precautions

WARNING• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the TV to rain or moisture.

CAUTION• Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.• Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When you unplug the TV, pull it

out by the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.• Never block or cover the cabinet openings

for ventilation. Never install the TV wheregood ventilation is unattainable. Wheninstalling this TV, leave spaces forventilation around the TV more than theminimum distances shown in the diagram.

• Do not allow objects or liquid into thecabinet openings.

• In the event of a fault, unplug the TV and call a service technician. Do not attempt torepair it by yourself or remove the rear cover.

• The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it whenhandling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled, wipe it with a soft dry cloth.Never rub it forcefully. Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.

• When you don’t use this TV for a long period of time, be sure to unplug it.

<AV-21LXB and AV-25LXB only>

The Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit is packaged together with the TV.Before you use the TV, mount the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit correctly on the TV.

15 cm

10 cm 15 cm10 cm

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:12 PM2

Black

Page 73: AV-29LS

3

Preparation

1 Confirm which remote control you haveYour TV comes with one of the three remote controls shown below. Functions you canoperate differ depending on the type of remote control.

LS series LX series LXB series

RM-C352 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

I/II

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C357 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

RM-C356 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

SUPERBASS

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

2 Insert the batteries into the remote controlCorrectly insert two batteries, observing the , and . polarities and inserting the .end first.

CAUTION:Follow the cautions printed on the batteries.

Notes:•Use AA/R6/UM-3 dry cell batteries.• If the remote control does not work properly,

fit new batteries.The supplied batteries are for testing, notregular use.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:12 PM3

Black

Page 74: AV-29LS

4

Preparation

3 Connecting the aerial and VCR• Read the manuals provided with the devices. Depending on the device, the connection method

may be different from the diagrams. Also the device settings may need to change depending onthe connection method.

• Turn off all the devices including the TV.• Connecting cables are not supplied.• When connecting monaural audio to the TV, use the L/MONO jack.• If your TV has an S-connector, you can connect an S-VIDEO compatible device (such as an S-

VHS VCR) to the S-connector with an S-VIDEO cable and enjoy the high quality picture of the S-VIDEO signal (Y/C signal). In that case, do not connect it to the TV with a video cable.

• If you connect the VCR to the TV only with an aerial cable, you should preset the video channelfrom the VCR to the AV channel (channel number 0) on this TV. See “MANUAL CH PRESET” onpage 18 and preset it manually.

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

R RRCR

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

V

R

MONOL/

VY/ V

R

L

R

MONOL/CB

CR

To RF output

To video output

To S-video output VCR

VHF/UHF outdoor aerial

To aerial input 1

To audio output

2

3

VHF/UHF outdoor aerial

S

OVER

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

Connecting the aerial

Connecting the aerial and VCR

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:12 PM4

Black

Page 75: AV-29LS

5

Preparation

4 Connecting other devicesIf you are not connecting any other devices, skip step 4 and perform step 5.

• Use the headphones with a stereo mini jack (3.5 mm in diameter). When you connect theheadphones, the TV speakers go off.

• The OUTPUT terminal outputs the video and sound signals which you are viewing on the TV.You can dub them onto the VCR connected to the OUTPUT terminal.(The OUTPUT terminal cannot output teletext programmes, S-VIDEO signals or componentvideo signals. Also it cannot output any signals when the TV is turned off.)

• Connect components outputting a component signal (Y/CB/CR signal), such as a DVD player, tothe VIDEO-2 terminal, and set VIDEO-2 SET function to “COMPONENT”. (See page 16.)

• The following illustrations are for the AV-29LS. Your TV’s front and rear pannels may not lookexactly like the illustrations.

L/MONOV R

IN (VIDEO-3)

Headphones

Camcorder or TV game

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

R RR

V V V

L

VCR (for playing)

VCR (for recording)

DVD player(composite signals)

DVD player(component video signals)

RCR

VY/

MONOL/MONOL/ CB

5 Connect the power cord to the AC outlet

Front

Rear

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:12 PM5

Black

Page 76: AV-29LS

6

Preparation

6 Initial settingWhen the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial setting mode, and the JVC logo isdisplayed. Follow the instructions on the on-screen display to perform the initialsettings.

1 Press the Main power buttonon the TV.

The POWER lamp lights. After theJVC logo has been displayed, the TVautomatically switches to thelanguage setting mode.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

• The JVC logo does not appear if yourTV has been turned on once before. Inthis case, use the LANGUAGE and AUTOCH PRESET functions to perform the ini-tial settings. For details, see pages 17 and19.

2 Press the MENU M buttons to select language.

3 Press the MENU T buttons to select “AUTO CH PRESET”.

4 Press the MENU M buttons to start the AUTO CH PRESET function.

“>>>ON SEARCH” is displayed on the screen.

When all the TV channels that can be received on your TV have been preset, thedisplay goes out and the AUTO CH PRESET function operation is completed.

To stop the AUTO CH PRESET function, press the MENU m buttons.

• If a TV channel you want to view is not set to the channel, set it with the MANUAL CH PRESETfunction. For details, see page 18.

This completes initial setting.Now you’re ready to enjoy your JVC TV.

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

DISPLAYbutton

MENU t buttonsMENU m

buttons

POWER lamp Main power button

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:12 PM6

Black

Page 77: AV-29LS

7

Basic operation

• The illustration below is for the remote controlRM-C352 supplied with LS series models. Yourremote control may not look exactly like theillustrations.

RM-C352 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

I/II

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

1 Press the POWER button to turnyour TV on.

• If your TV does not turn on, press the Mainpower button on the TV then press thePOWER button again.

• You can also turn on your TV by pressingany of the following buttons;

- the CHANNEL m button

- the Number buttons

- the TV/VIDEO button

2 Select a channel.

Press the CHANNEL m button.• Up/down selection cannot be selected for

channels to which the SKIP has been setto “YES”. See page 19.

Press the Number buttons to enterthe channel number.• If you want to enter a two-digit number,

press the -/-- button to select the two digitmode “--”, then enter the channel num-ber.

3 Press the VOLUME M button toadjust the sound.

4 To turn your TV off, press thePOWER button.

• We recommend that you press the Mainpower button on the TV to turn the mainpower off if you do not plan to use your TVfor a long time or if you wish to save energy.

If the picture is not clear:Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button toselect another colour system, see page 8.

If the sound is not clear:Press the SOUND SYSTEM button to selectanother sound system, see page 8.

Viewing Images from an ExternalDevice:Press the TV/VIDEO button to select theVIDEO mode.• You can also use the INPUT function to select

the VIDEO mode. For details, refer to page 14.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:12 PM7

Black

Page 78: AV-29LS

8

Remote control buttons and functions

ECO SENSOR buttonYou can adjust this TV so that the screenautomatically adjusts to the optimumcontrast according to the brightness of yourroom. This function reduces eye strain andthe power consumption of this TV.

Press this button to select the desiredmode.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR DISPLAY:The ECO SENSOR function switches on. Inthis mode, the clover mark indicating thebrightness of your room is displayed forseveral seconds each time the brightnesschanges. The number of clover marksdisplayed on screen increases as your roombecomes darker.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR:The ECO SENSOR function switches on.However, in this mode, the clover mark willnot be displayed.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR OFF:The ECO SENSOR function switches off.

PICTURE MODE buttonYou can select one of three pictureadjustment settings as you like.

Press this button to select a mode.

BRIGHT:Heightens contrast and sharpness.

STANDARD:Standardizes picture adjustments.

SOFT:Softens contrast and sharpness.• Pressing this button returns all the picture set-

tings in “MENU 4” to their default settings.

COLOUR SYSTEM buttonIf the picture is not clear or no colourappears, change the current colour systemto another colour system.

Press this button to select the coloursystem.

AUTO PAL SECAMNTSC3.58NTSC4.43

AUTO:Automatic colour system selection.

• For the colour systems in each country orregion, see the table“Broadcasting systems” onthe back cover.

• If the picture is not normal in the AUTO mode,change the AUTO mode to another coloursystem.

SOUND SYSTEM buttonIf the sound is not clear even when thepicture appears normal, change thecurrent sound system to another soundsystem.

Press this button to select the soundsystem.

B/G I D/K M

• For the sound systems in each country or re-gion, see the table “Broadcasting systems” onthe back cover.

• You cannot select any sound system when in aVIDEO mode.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:12 PM8

Black

Page 79: AV-29LS

9

Remote control buttons and functions

button< LS series only >

You can select a sound setting for stereobroadcast programmes and bilingualprogrammes.

Press this button to select a soundsetting.

: Stereo sound: Bilingual I (sub I) sound: Bilingual II (sub II) sound: Monaural sound

MONO : Cancels the multi-sound function,and the sound becomes monaural.

• If you have poor reception of a stereo broad-cast, you can change from stereo sound ( )to monaural sound ( ) so that you can hearthe broadcast more clearly and easily.

• If the multi-sound function cannot work nor-mally due to poor signal quality, noise may beincluded in the sound, or the sound may changemany times. If this happens, change the soundsetting to MONO mode to cancel the multi-soundfunction.

SUPER BASS button< LXB series only >

You can enjoy a powerful bass sound byusing the SUPER BASS (Super Bass Reflex)function.

Press this button to turn the SUPERBASS function on or off.

• To use this function, you must first mount theTwin Port Bass Blaster Unit packaged with theTV on top of the TV. For details, see page 20.

MUTING buttonYou can turn the sound off instantly.

Press this button.

To turn the sound on, press this buttonagain.

DISPLAY buttonYou can continuously display the currentchannel number or VIDEO mode on thescreen.

Press this button.

To turn the display off, press this buttonagain.

OFF TIMER buttonYou can set the TV to automatically turn offafter a set time.

Press this button to select the period oftime.

• You can set the period of time to a maximum of120 minutes in 10 minute increments.

• 1 minute before the OFF TIMER function turnsoff the TV, “GOOD NIGHT!” appears.

To display the remaining time, press thisbutton once.

To cancel the OFF TIMER function, pressthis button to set the period of time to 0.

• The OFF TIMER function will not turn off theTV’s main power.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM9

Black

Page 80: AV-29LS

10

Remote control buttons and functions

RETURN + buttonYou can set a channel you frequently viewto the Return Channel and you can viewthat channel at any time with one-touch.

To set the channel to the ReturnChannel:

1 Select the channel you want to setto the Return Channel.

2 Press this button and hold until themessage “RETURN PLUSPROGRAMMED!” appears.

• When you turn off the TV, the Return Chan-nel setting is cancelled.

To view the Return Channel:Press this button.• You can view two channels (current channel

and Return Channel) alternately by pressing thisbutton.

To cancel the Return Channel setting:Press this button and hold until themessage“RETURN PLUS CANCELLED!”appears.

If no channel is set to the ReturnChannel:You can view the channel selected rightbefore the current channel by pressingthis button.

CHANNEL SCAN buttonYou can quickly view all TV channelsprogrammes that you can view on your TV,and search for the programme you want toview.

1 Press this button to start scanningTV channels.

The TV channel programmes are eachdisplayed for several seconds.• The programmes of TV channels for which

the SKIP function is set to “YES” are notdisplayed.

2 When you find the programme youwant to view, press this buttonagain to stop scanning.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM10

Black

Page 81: AV-29LS

11

Viewing teletext programmes

< LS series only >

TEXT

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

RETURN

I/II 4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

TV/TEXT

REVEAL

HOLD

MODE

SIZE

STORE

Colouredbuttons

INDEX

CANCEL

SUBPAGE

Basic operation

1 Select a TV channel with a teletextprogramme.

2 Press the TV/TEXT button to changethe TV mode to the teletext mode.

The mode cycles as follows.

TV mode TEXT mode (TEXT only)MIX mode (TV and TEXT)

3 Select a teletext page by pressingthe CHANNEL M button,Number buttons or colouredbuttons.

To return to the TV mode, press the TV/VIDEO button or the TV/TEXT button.• If you have trouble receiving teletext broad-

casts, consult your local dealer or the tele-text station.

Using the List ModeYou can store the numbers of your favouriteteletext pages in the List mode and call themup quickly using the coloured buttons.

To store the page numbers:

1 Press the MODE button to engagethe List mode.

The stored page numbers are displayedat the bottom of the screen.

2 Press a coloured button to select aposition. Then press the Numberbuttons to enter the page number.

3 Press and hold down the STOREbutton.

The four page numbers blink white toindicate that they are stored in memory.

To call up a stored page:

1 Press the MODE button to engagethe List mode.

2 Press a coloured button to which apage has been assigned.

To exit the List mode, press the MODEbutton again.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM11

Black

Page 82: AV-29LS

12

Viewing teletext programmes

REVEALSome teletext pages include hidden text(such as answers to a quiz).You can display the hidden text.

Each time you press the REVEAL button,text is hidden or revealed.

HOLDYou can hold a teletext page on the screenfor as long as you want, even while severalother teletext pages are being received.

Press the HOLD button

To cancel the HOLD function, press theHOLD button again.

CANCELYou can watch a TV programme even whenin the teletext mode.

1 Press the Number button to enter apage number, or press a colouredbutton.

The TV starts searching for a teletextpage.

2 Press the CANCEL button.

The TV programme appears.

When the TV finds the teletext page, itspage number appears in the upper left ofthe screen.

3 Press the CANCEL button to viewthe teletext page.

• Pressing the CANCEL button cannot changethe teletext mode to the TV mode.

INDEXYou can return to the index page instantly.

Press the INDEX button.

In the List mode:Returns to the page number displayed inthe lower left area of the screen.

SUBPAGESome teletext pages include sub-pages thatare automatically displayed.You can hold any sub-page, or view it atany time.

1 Press the SUBPAGE button tooperate the Sub-page function.

2 Press the Number buttons to enter asub-page number.

Example:3rd sub-page press 0, 0, 0 and 3.• You can also select a sub-page by pressing

the red or green button.

To cancel the Sub-page function, press theSUBPAGE button again.

SIZEYou can double the height of the teletextdisplay.

Press the SIZE button.

The teletext display changes cyclically.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM12

Black

Page 83: AV-29LS

13

Using the TV’s menus

This TV has a number of functions you can operate using the menus. To use all your TV’sfunctions fully, you need to understand how to use the menus.

4 Press the MENU M buttons tochange function settings.

Example:

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF OFF CHILD LOCK OFF BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

⇔ MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK OFF BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

• With some functions, the operation methodmay differ.

5 Press the DISPLAY button to turnthe display off.

•To operate a menu using the buttons onthe front panel of the TV, refer to“Operating menus” on page 22.

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

DISPLAYbutton

MENU t buttonsMENU m

buttons

Basic operation

1 Press the MENU T buttons.One of the 5 menus is displayed.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Repeatedly press the MENU Tbuttons to display a desiredmenu.

• If you hold down the y button, the nextmenu is displayed.

• If the selected function is on the first line,pressing the r button displays the preced-ing menu.

3 Repeatedly press the MENU Tbuttons to select a desiredfunction.

Changes the AUTOSHUTOFF setting.

MENU number

The icon on theleft indicates thecurrently selectedfunction.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM13

Black

Page 84: AV-29LS

14

Using the TV’s menus

INPUTYou can view images from VCRs or otherdevices connected to your TV.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“INPUT”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select the VIDEOmode.

TV mode changes to VIDEO mode.

PICTURE TILT< AV-29 series and AV-34 series only >

There are cases where the Earth’s magneticforce may make the picture tilt. If thishappens, you can correct the picture tilt.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“PICTURE TILT”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Continue pressing MENU M untilthe picture becomes level.

VNRYou can reduce picture noise.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“VNR”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the VNR function, select “OFF”.

COMPRESS (16:9)This function converts a normal picture (4:3aspect ratio) into a wide picture (16:9 aspectratio).Use for pictures with a 16:9 aspect ratio thathave been squeezed into a normal picture(4:3 aspect ratio), to restore their originaldimensions.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“COMPRESS (16:9)”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the COMPRESS (16:9) function,select “OFF”.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM14

Black

Page 85: AV-29LS

15

Using the TV’s menus

AUTO SHUTOFFYou can set your TV to turn off if no signalsare received for about 15 minutes or longerafter the end of a broadcast.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “AUTOSHUTOFF”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the AUTO SHUTOFF function,select “OFF”.• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not turn

off the TV’s main power.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for aVIDEO mode.

CHILD LOCKYou can disable the front control buttons ofthe TV.When this function is set to “ON”, the TVcan be operated using only the remotecontrol.Use this function to prevent children fromoperating the TV without parental consent.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “CHILDLOCK”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the CHILD LOCK function,select “OFF”.

• The CHILD LOCK function is canceled whenyou turn the TV’s main power off.

BLUE BACKYou can mute the sound and change thepicture into a blue screen while no signalsare received by the TV, or when the signalsare unstable.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “BLUEBACK”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the BLUE BACK function, select“OFF”.• To view a broadcast even when the recep-

tion signal is poor, set the BLUE BACK func-tion to “OFF”.

• Even when the BLUE BACK function is setto “OFF”, the sound may not be audible.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM15

Black

Page 86: AV-29LS

16

Using the TV’s menus

VIDEO-2 SETSet the VIDEO-2 SET correctly according tothe video signal input from the externaldevice connected to the VIDEO-2 terminal.If this setting is incorrect, images will notbe displayed.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select“VIDEO-2 SET”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Set the VIDEO-2 SET according tothe video signal input from theVIDEO-2 terminal.

If a normal video signal (compositevideo signal) is input:Press the MENU m buttons to select“VIDEO”.

If a component video signal (Y/CB/CR

signals) is input:Press the MENU m buttons to select“COMPONENT”.

Picture AdjustmentsYou can adjust the picture as you like.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 4” menu.

MENU 4TINTCOLOURBRIGHTCONT.SHARP

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU T to select an itemand press MENU M to adjust it.

TINT* - : Reddish + : GreenishCOLOUR - : Lighter + : DeeperBRIGHT - : Darker + : BrighterCONT. - : Lower + : HigherSHARP - : Softer + : Sharper

* TINT (tint) is displayed only when viewingimages from NTSC3.58 or NTSC4.43 coloursystems.

Sound AdjustmentsYou can adjust the sound as you like.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON MONO SURROUND ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU T to select an itemand press MENU M to adjust it.

TREBLE - : Weaker + : StrongerBASS - : Weaker + : StrongerBALANCE - : Left + : Right

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:13 PM16

Black

Page 87: AV-29LS

17

Using the TV’s menus

MONO SURROUND< LX series and LXB series only>

You can enjoy normal monaural sound moreby converting it into a stereo-like sound.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu, then select“MONO SURROUND”.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON MONO SURROUND ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the MONO SURROUNDfunction, select “OFF”.

AI VOLUMEYou can prevent the sudden increase ordecrease of volume that occurs whenchanging channels or switching VIDEOmodes.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu, then select“AI VOLUME”.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON MONO SURROUND ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the AI VOLUME function, select“OFF”.

• The AI VOLUME function may not operate asexpected if the sound input level from a broad-cast station (or video software) is extremely low.

• The AI VOLUME function for TV mode andVIDEO mode can be set separately. For example,you can set it to be off in TV mode and on inVIDEO mode. If you set the AI VOLUME func-tion while viewing a TV channel, the setting isregistered as the setting for TV mode. If you setthe AI VOLUME function while viewing imagesfrom a VIDEO terminal, the setting is registeredas the setting for VIDEO mode.

AUTO CH PRESETYou can automatically preset all TV channelsthat can be received by your TV to channels.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select “AUTOCH PRESET”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to start the AUTOCH PRESET function.

“>>>ON SEARCH” is displayed on thescreen.When all the TV channels that can bereceived on your TV have been preset,the display goes out and the AUTO CHPRESET function operation is completed.

To stop the AUTO CH PRESET:Press the MENU m button.

• The AUTO CH PRESET function does not preseta TV channel to the AV channel (channel num-ber 0).

• If the TV cannot preset the TV channel you wantto view, preset it manually. For details, see“MANUAL CH PRESET” on page 18.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:14 PM17

Black

Page 88: AV-29LS

18

Using the TV’s menus

MANUAL CH PRESETYou can manually preset desired TVchannels to desired channels.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“MANUAL CH PRESET”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M.

The sub-menu is displayed.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYSEARCH BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

• The channel number is displayed as a PRnumber. For example, channel 1 will be dis-played as PR 1. However, the AV channelwill be displayed as AV.

3 Press MENU M to select thechannel number.

4 Press VOLUME M to start search-ing for the TV channel.

“>>>” or “<<<” is displayed on thescreen.When the TV finds a TV channel, the“>>>” or “<<<” display goes out, andthe TV channel is preset to the currentlyselected channel number.• If the TV channel you want to preset is not

displayed, repeat step 4 until the TV findsthe TV channel you want to preset.

• To stop the MANUAL CH PRESET function,press any button other than the VOLUMEm button.

If the picture is not clear:Fine-tune the TV channel.

1 Press MENU t to select “FINE”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYFINE BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Hold VOLUME m down to fine-tunethe TV channel so that the best imageis displayed on screen.

“>” or “<” indicates that the TV is fine-tuning the TV channel.

If the sound is not clear:

1 Press MENU t to select “SOUNDSYSTEM”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYCHANGE BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Press VOLUME m to select theappropriate sound system.

• For the sound systems in each countryor region, refer to the table “Broadcastingsystems” on the back cover.

5 Press MENU T to select“MANUAL”.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want topreset another TV channel to achannel.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:14 PM18

Black

Page 89: AV-29LS

19

Using the TV’s menus

SKIPYou can set undesired channels to beskipped. Channels set to be skipped cannotbe selected by the CHANNEL m buttonsnor the CHANNEL SCAN button.• Channels to which TV channels have not been

preset are automatically set to be skipped.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“MANUAL CH PRESET”.

2 Press MENU M.

The sub-menu is displayed.

3 Press MENU T to select “SKIP”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYYES/NO BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

4 Press MENU M to select thechannel you want to skip.

5 Press VOLUME M to select “YES”.

The channel is set to be skipped.To cancel the SKIP function, select “NO”.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 if you want toset another channel to skip.

LANGUAGEYou can select the language for the on-screendisplay.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“LANGUAGE”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to selectlanguage.

The on-screen display indications are inthe selected language.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:14 PM19

Black

Page 90: AV-29LS

20

Attaching the Twin Port BassBlaster Unit

<AV-21LXB and AV-25LXB only>

The Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit is packaged together with the TV. Before you use the TV,mount the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit correctly on the TV.

Note:

• The SUPER BASS functions do not work unless the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit is connected correctlyto the TV. For details on the SUPER BASS functions, see page 9.

CAUTION:

• The Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit is just placed on top of the TV and is not held in place by a screw.When you use the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit, pay attention to the following cautions. Otherwise, theTwin Port Bass Blaster Unit or TV may fall over and be damaged, or cause unexpected injury.- Do not rest your hands or elbows on the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit.- Do not move the TV with the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit mounted on top of the TV. Before you move

the TV, be sure to remove the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit.- Do not move the TV by holding the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit.

Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

BASSSPEAKER

OUT

R RRCR

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

1 Place the Twin Port Bass BlasterUnit on top of the TV making surethat the mounting pin on thebottom of the Twin Port Bass BlasterUnit fits into the mounting hole onthe top of the TV.

• When you mount the Twin Port Bass BlasterUnit, make sure that the mounting pin fitsproperly into the mounting hole. Otherwise,the Twin Port Bass Blaster Unit may slide offthe top of the TV. This may damage the TwinPort Bass Blaster Unit or cause unexpectedinjury.

2 Firmly insert the Twin Port BassBlaster Unit connector into theBASS SPEAKER OUT terminal.

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:14 PM20

Black

Page 91: AV-29LS

21

1 Headphone jack2 VIDEO-3 terminal3 MENU button4 CHANNEL m buttons

1 VIDEO-1 INPUT terminal2 S/VIDEO-1INPUT terminal3 COMPONENT (VIDEO-2)

INPUT terminal

5432

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

5431

S

OVER

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

R RRCR

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

R RRCR

4 OUTPUT terminal5 Aerial socket

5 VOLUME m buttons6 TV/VIDEO button7 POWER lamp8 Main power button

TV buttons and parts

Front

<AV-29 series and AV-34 series>

<AV-21 series and AV-25 series>

Rea

7 8

321 64 5

L/MONOV R

IN (VIDEO-3)

1 2 3 4 5

7 8

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:14 PM21

Black

Page 92: AV-29LS

22

Basic operation• Check to make sure the CHILD LOCK function

is set to “OFF”. When the CHILD LOCK functionis set to “ON”, the TV cannot be operated usingthe front control buttons. For details, see “CHILDLOCK” on page 15.

1 Press CHANNEL M to turn the TVon from standby mode.

2 Press CHANNEL M to select achannel.

3 Press VOLUME M to adjust thevolume.

4 To turn your TV off, press the Mainpower button to turn off the TV’smain power.

To change the TV mode to the VIDEOmode:•Press the TV/VIDEO button if the TV has

one. See page 7.• If the TV has no TV/VIDEO button,

select the VIDEO mode with the INPUTfunction in “MENU 1”.

Operating menus

You can operate functions in menus usingthe front control buttons on the TV.

1 Press MENU y to display a menu.

2 Press MENU y repeatedly to displaythe menu you want to use.

3 Press MENU y to select the desiredfunction or item.

4 Press MENU M or VOLUME M tocarry out the desired operation.

For details, see the description for eachfunction.

5 Press VOLUME M to turn the menudisplay off.

To turn the sub-menu display off:

1 Press MENU y to select “EXIT”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYEXIT BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Press VOLUME m to turn the displayoff.

Using the buttons on the TV

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:14 PM22

Black

Page 93: AV-29LS

23

Troubleshooting

If there is no picture or the TV does not operate normally, make sure the problem isn’t due tothe reasons indicated below.If the problem persists even after taking the measures indicated, please contact a servicetechnician.

Cannot turn the TV on

• Press the Main power button on the TV.

• Connect the power cord to the AC outlet.

The screen turns blue

• Is the BLUE BLACK function on? (see page 15.)

Remote control inoperable

• Replace the batteries. (see page 3.)

Buttons on front of the TV do not work

• Switch the CHILD LOCK function off. (see page15.)

TV does not respond immediately

• Press the main power button on the TV to turnoff the main power. Press the main power buttonagain to turn on the TV. If the TV returns to anormal state, operation is normal.

The TV turns off suddenly

• Is the OFF TIMER function set to operate? (seepage 9.)

• Is the AUTO SHUTOFF function on? (see page15.)

Poor sound

• Press the SOUND SYSTEM button to select an-other sound system. (see page 8.)

• Adjust the sound settings. (see page 16.)

< LS series only >• If there is noise during mono sound output,

press the button to select “MONO”.(see page 9.)

Poor picture

• Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button to select an-other colour system. (see page 8.)

• Adjust the picture settings. (see page 16.)• Is a component signal output device, such as a

DVD player, connected correctly? (see page 5.)

• Is the “VIDEO-2 SET” function setting correct?(see page 16.)

• If noise (snow) totally blocks out the picture,check the following.

- Have the TV and aerial been connected properly?- Has the aerial cable been damaged?

- Is the aerial pointing in the right direction?

- Is the aerial itself faulty?

• If the TV or aerial suffer interference from otherequipment, stripes or noise may appear in thepicture. Move any equipment which can causeinterference away from the TV.

• If the TV or aerial suffer interference fromsignals reflecting from mountains or buildings,double-pictures (ghosting) will occur. Changethe aerial’s direction or replace it with an aerialwith better directionality.

• When a white and bright still image (such as awhite dress) is displayed on the screen, thewhite part may look as if it is coloured. Whenthe image disappears from the screen, theunnatural colours will also disappear.

The picture is tilted

< AV-29 series and AV-34 series only >

• A picture may be tilted due to the influence ofthe earth’s magnetism. In this case, use the PIC-TURE TILT function to adjust the tilt. (see page14.)

LCT0935-001A-H 01.5.11, 4:14 PM23

Black

Page 94: AV-29LS

Asia,Middle

East

Specifications

TV RF systemsB, G, I, D, K, K1, M

Colour systemsPAL, SECAM, NTSC 3.58 MHz, NTSC 4.43 MHz

Channel and frequenciesVHF low channel (VL), VHF high channel (VH), UHF channel (U)Receives cable channels in mid band, super band and hyper band.

External input / outputVIDEO-1: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R input,

(If your TV has a S-connector ; S-video input)VIDEO-2/COMPONENT: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R input,

COMPONENT VIDEO (Y/CB/CR) inputVIDEO-3: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R inputOUTPUT: VIDEO output , AUDIO L/R outputHeadphone jack: stereo mini jack (3.5 mm diameter)

Teletext system < LS series only >FLOF (Fastext), WST (World Standard Text)

Sound-multiplex systems < LS series only >A2 or NICAM (B/G, I, DK)

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

Broadcasting systems

Area Country or RegionSystem

Colour SoundBahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc. PAL B/GIndonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Thailand,India, etc.

China, Vietnam, etc. PAL D/K

Hong Kong, etc. PAL I

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon, Saudi Arabia, etc. SECAM B/G

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc. NTSC M

Russia, etc. SECAM D/K

EuropeCzech Republic, Poland, etc. PAL D/K

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc. PAL B/G

UK, etc. PAL I

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc. PAL B/G

Republic of South Africa, etc. PAL I

Africa Nigeria, etc. PAL B/G

Egypt, Morocco, etc. SECAM B/G

LCT0935 Cover 01.5.11, 6:12 PM2

Black

Page 95: AV-29LS

LCT1006-001A-H0401-Ki-NV-JMT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

COLOUR TELEVISION

INSTRUCTIONSThank you for buying this JVCcolour television.To make sure you understand how touse your new TV, please read thismanual thoroughly before you begin.

AV-21LHAV-25LHAV-29LHAV-34LH

Contents

Safety precautions 2Preparation 2

1 Insert the batteries into the remote control ... 22 Connecting the aerial and VCR .................. 33 Connecting other devices .......................... 44 Connect the power cord to the AC outlet ... 45 Initial setting ............................................... 5

Basic operation 6Remote control buttons and functions 7

ECO SENSOR button ..................................... 7PICTURE MODE button ................................. 7COLOUR SYSTEM button ............................. 7SOUND SYSTEM button ............................... 7

button ............................................. 9MUTING button ............................................. 8DISPLAY button ............................................. 8OFF TIMER button ......................................... 8RETURN + button .......................................... 9CHANNEL SCAN button ................................ 9

Using the TV’s menus 10Basic operation ............................................ 10INPUT ........................................................... 11PICTURE TILT ............................................... 11VNR ............................................................... 11COMPRESS (16:9) ........................................ 11AUTO SHUTOFF .......................................... 12CHILD LOCK ................................................. 12BLUE BACK .................................................. 12VIDEO-2 SET ................................................ 13Picture Adjustments .................................... 13Sound Adjustments ..................................... 13AI VOLUME .................................................. 14AUTO CH PRESET ....................................... 14MANUAL CH PRESET .................................. 15SKIP .............................................................. 16LANGUAGE .................................................. 16

TV buttons and parts 17Using the buttons on the TV 18Troubleshooting 19Specifications 20

LCT1006-001A-H_Cover 01.5.11, 6:27 PM1

Black

Page 96: AV-29LS

2

Safety precautions

WARNING• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the TV to rain or moisture.

CAUTION• Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.• Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When you unplug the TV, pull it

out by the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.• Never block or cover the cabinet openings

for ventilation. Never install the TV wheregood ventilation is unattainable. Wheninstalling this TV, leave spaces forventilation around the TV more than theminimum distances shown in the diagram.

• Do not allow objects or liquid into thecabinet openings.

• In the event of a fault, unplug the TV and call a service technician. Do not attempt torepair it by yourself or remove the rear cover.

• The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it whenhandling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled, wipe it with a soft dry cloth.Never rub it forcefully. Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.

• When you don’t use this TV for a long period of time, be sure to unplug it.

Preparation

1 Insert the batteries into the remote controlCorrectly insert two batteries, observing the , and . polarities and inserting the .end first.

CAUTION:Follow the cautions printed on the batteries.

Notes:•Use AA/R6/UM-3 dry cell batteries.• If the remote control does not work properly,

fit new batteries.The supplied batteries are for testing, notregular use.

15 cm

10 cm 15 cm10 cm

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM2

Black

Page 97: AV-29LS

3

Preparation

2 Connecting the aerial and VCR• Read the manuals provided with the devices. Depending on the device, the connection method

may be different from the diagrams. Also the device settings may need to change depending onthe connection method.

• Turn off all the devices including the TV.• Connecting cables are not supplied.• When connecting monaural audio to the TV, use the L/MONO jack.• If you connect the VCR to the TV only with an aerial cable, you should preset the video channel

from the VCR to the AV channel (channel number 0) on this TV. See “MANUAL CH PRESET” onpage 15 and preset it manually.

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

R RRCR

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

V

R

MONOL/

VY/ V

R

L

R

MONOL/CB

CR

To RF output

To video output

VCR

VHF/UHF outdoor aerial

To aerial input 1

To audio output

2

3

VHF/UHF outdoor aerial

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

Connecting the aerial

Connecting the aerial and VCR

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM3

Black

Page 98: AV-29LS

4

Preparation

3 Connecting other devicesIf you are not connecting any other devices, skip step 3 and perform step 4.

• Use the headphones with a stereo mini jack (3.5 mm in diameter). When you connect theheadphones, the TV speakers go off.

• The OUTPUT terminal outputs the video and sound signals which you are viewing on the TV.You can dub them onto the VCR connected to the OUTPUT terminal.(The OUTPUT terminal cannot output component video signals. Also it cannot output anysignals when the TV is turned off.)

• Connect components outputting a component signal (Y/CB/CR signal), such as a DVD player, tothe VIDEO-2 terminal, and set VIDEO-2 SET function to “COMPONENT”. (See page 13.)

• The following illustrations are for the AV-29LH. Your TV’s front and rear pannels may not lookexactly like the illustrations.

L/MONOV R

IN (VIDEO-3)

Headphones

Camcorder or TV game

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

R RR

V V V

L

VCR (for playing)

VCR (for recording)

DVD player(composite signals)

DVD player(component video signals)

RCR

VY/

MONOL/MONOL/ CB

4 Connect the power cord to the AC outlet

Front

Rear

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM4

Black

Page 99: AV-29LS

5

Preparation

5 Initial settingWhen the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial setting mode, and the JVC logo isdisplayed. Follow the instructions on the on-screen display to perform the initialsettings.

1 Press the Main power buttonon the TV.

The POWER lamp lights. After theJVC logo has been displayed, the TVautomatically switches to thelanguage setting mode.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

• The JVC logo does not appear if yourTV has been turned on once before. Inthis case, use the LANGUAGE and AUTOCH PRESET functions to perform the ini-tial settings. For details, see pages 14and 16.

2 Press the MENU M buttons to select language.

3 Press the MENU T buttons to select “AUTO CH PRESET”

4 Press the MENU M buttons to start the AUTO CH PRESET function.

“>>>ON SEARCH” is displayed on the screen.

When all the TV channels that can be received on your TV have been preset, thedisplay goes out and the AUTO CH PRESET function operation is completed.

To stop the AUTO CH PRESET function, press the MENU m buttons.

• If a TV channel you want to view is not set to the channel, set it with the MANUAL CH PRESETfunction. For details, see page 15.

This completes initial setting.Now you’re ready to enjoy your JVC TV.

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

DISPLAYbutton

MENU t buttonsMENU m

buttons

POWER lamp Main power button

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM5

Black

Page 100: AV-29LS

6

Basic operation

RM-C353 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

I/II

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

1 Press the POWER button to turnyour TV on.

• If your TV does not turn on, press the Mainpower button on the TV then press thePOWER button again.

• You can also turn on your TV by pressingany of the following buttons;

- the CHANNEL m button

- the Number buttons

- the TV/VIDEO button

2 Select a channel.

Press the CHANNEL m button.• Up/down selection cannot be selected for

channels to which the SKIP has been setto “YES”. See page 16.

Press the Number buttons to enterthe channel number.• If you want to enter a two-digit number,

press the -/-- button to select the two digitmode “--”, then enter the channel num-ber.

3 Press the VOLUME M button toadjust the sound.

4 To turn your TV off, press thePOWER button.

• We recommend that you press the Mainpower button on the TV to turn the mainpower off if you do not plan to use your TVfor a long time or if you wish to save energy.

If the picture is not clear:Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button toselect another colour system, see page 7.

If the sound is not clear:Press the SOUND SYSTEM button to selectanother sound system, see page 7.

Viewing Images from an ExternalDevice:Press the TV/VIDEO button to select theVIDEO mode.• You can also use the INPUT function to select

the VIDEO mode. For details, refer to page 11.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM6

Black

Page 101: AV-29LS

7

Remote control buttons and functions

ECO SENSOR buttonYou can adjust this TV so that the screenautomatically adjusts to the optimumcontrast according to the brightness of yourroom. This function reduces eye strain andthe power consumption of this TV.

Press this button to select the desiredmode.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR DISPLAY:The ECO SENSOR function switches on. Inthis mode, the clover mark indicating thebrightness of your room is displayed forseveral seconds each time the brightnesschanges. The number of clover marksdisplayed on screen increases as your roombecomes darker.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR:The ECO SENSOR function switches on.However, in this mode, the clover mark willnot be displayed.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR OFF:The ECO SENSOR function switches off.

PICTURE MODE buttonYou can select one of three pictureadjustment settings as you like.

Press this button to select a mode.

BRIGHT:Heightens contrast and sharpness.

STANDARD:Standardizes picture adjustments.

SOFT:Softens contrast and sharpness.• Pressing this button returns all the picture set-

tings in “MENU 4” to their default settings.

COLOUR SYSTEM buttonIf the picture is not clear or no colourappears, change the current colour systemto another colour system.

Press this button to select the coloursystem.

AUTO PAL SECAMNTSC3.58NTSC4.43

AUTO:Automatic colour system selection.

• For the colour systems in each country orregion, see the table“Broadcasting systems” onpage 20.

• If the picture is not normal in the AUTO mode,change the AUTO mode to another coloursystem.

SOUND SYSTEM buttonIf the sound is not clear even when thepicture appears normal, change thecurrent sound system to another soundsystem.

Press this button to select the soundsystem.

B/G I D/K M

• For the sound systems in each country or re-gion, see the table “Broadcasting systems” onpage 20.

• You cannot select any sound system when in aVIDEO mode.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM7

Black

Page 102: AV-29LS

8

Remote control buttons and functions

buttonYou can select a sound setting for stereobroadcast programmes and bilingualprogrammes.

Press this button to select a soundsetting.

: Stereo sound: Bilingual I (sub I) sound: Bilingual II (sub II) sound: Monaural sound

MONO : Cancels the multi-sound function,and the sound becomes monaural.

• If you have poor reception of a stereo broad-cast, you can change from stereo sound ( )to monaural sound ( ) so that you can hearthe broadcast more clearly and easily.

• If the multi-sound function cannot work nor-mally due to poor signal quality, noise may beincluded in the sound, or the sound may changemany times. If this happens, change the soundsetting to MONO mode to cancel the multi-soundfunction.

MUTING buttonYou can turn the sound off instantly.

Press this button.

To turn the sound on, press this buttonagain.

DISPLAY buttonYou can continuously display the currentchannel number or VIDEO mode on thescreen.

Press this button.

To turn the display off, press this buttonagain.

• When selecting a VIDEO mode with no signal,indication of the VIDEO mode becomes fixedon the screen.

OFF TIMER buttonYou can set the TV to automatically turn offafter a set time.

Press this button to select the period oftime.

• You can set the period of time to a maximum of120 minutes in 10 minute increments.

• 1 minute before the OFF TIMER function turnsoff the TV, “GOOD NIGHT!” appears.

To display the remaining time, press thisbutton once.

To cancel the OFF TIMER function, pressthis button to set the period of time to 0.

• The OFF TIMER function will not turn off theTV’s main power.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM8

Black

Page 103: AV-29LS

9

Remote control buttons and functions

CHANNEL SCAN buttonYou can quickly view all TV channelsprogrammes that you can view on your TV,and search for the programme you want toview.

1 Press this button to start scanningTV channels.

The TV channel programmes are eachdisplayed for several seconds.• The programmes of TV channels for which

the SKIP function is set to “YES” are notdisplayed.

2 When you find the programme youwant to view, press this buttonagain to stop scanning.

RETURN + buttonYou can set a channel you frequently viewto the Return Channel and you can viewthat channel at any time with one-touch.

To set the channel to the ReturnChannel:

1 Select the channel you want to setto the Return Channel.

2 Press this button and hold until themessage “RETURN PLUS PRO-GRAMMED!” appears.

• When you turn off the TV, the Return Chan-nel setting is cancelled.

To view the Return Channel:Press this button.• You can view two channels (current channel

and Return Channel) alternately by pressing thisbutton.

To cancel the Return Channel setting:Press this button and hold until themessage“RETURN PLUS CANCELLED!”appears.

If no channel is set to the ReturnChannel:You can view the channel selected rightbefore the current channel by pressingthis button.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM9

Black

Page 104: AV-29LS

10

Using the TV’s menus

This TV has a number of functions you can operate using the menus. To use all your TV’sfunctions fully, you need to understand how to use the menus.

4 Press the MENU M buttons tochange function settings.

Example:

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF OFF CHILD LOCK OFF BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

⇔ MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK OFF BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

• With some functions, the operation methodmay differ.

5 Press the DISPLAY button to turnthe display off.

•To operate a menu using the buttons onthe front panel of the TV, refer to“Operating menus” on page 18.

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

DISPLAYbutton

MENU t buttonsMENU m

buttons

Basic operation

1 Press the MENU T buttons.One of the 5 menus is displayed.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Repeatedly press the MENU Tbuttons to display a desiredmenu.

• If you hold down the y button, the nextmenu is displayed.

• If the selected function is on the first line,pressing the r button displays the preced-ing menu.

3 Repeatedly press the MENU Tbuttons to select a desiredfunction.

The icon on theleft indicates thecurrently selectedfunction.

MENU number

Changes the AUTOSHUTOFF setting.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:18 PM10

Black

Page 105: AV-29LS

11

Using the TV’s menus

INPUTYou can view images from VCRs or otherdevices connected to your TV.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“INPUT”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “VIDEO 1”,“VIDEO 2” or “VIDEO 3”.

TV mode changes to VIDEO mode.

PICTURE TILT<AV-29LH and AV-34LH only>

There are cases where the Earth’s magneticforce may make the picture tilt. If thishappens, you can correct the picture tilt.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“PICTURE TILT”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Continue pressing MENU M untilthe picture becomes level.

VNRYou can reduce picture noise.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“VNR”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the VNR function, select “OFF”.

COMPRESS (16:9)This function converts a normal picture (4:3aspect ratio) into a wide picture (16:9 aspectratio).Use for pictures with a 16:9 aspect ratio thathave been squeezed into a normal picture(4:3 aspect ratio), to restore their originaldimensions.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“COMPRESS (16:9)”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the COMPRESS (16:9) function,select “OFF”.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM11

Black

Page 106: AV-29LS

12

Using the TV’s menus

AUTO SHUTOFFYou can set your TV to turn off if no signalsare received for about 15 minutes or longerafter the end of a broadcast.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “AUTOSHUTOFF”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the AUTO SHUTOFF function,select “OFF”.• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not turn

off the TV’s main power.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for aVIDEO mode.

CHILD LOCKYou can disable the front control buttons ofthe TV.When this function is set to “ON”, the TVcan be operated using only the remotecontrol.Use this function to prevent children fromoperating the TV without parental consent.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “CHILDLOCK”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the CHILD LOCK function,select “OFF”.

• The CHILD LOCK function is canceled whenyou turn the TV’s main power off.

BLUE BACKYou can mute the sound and change thepicture into a blue screen while no signalsare received by the TV, or when the signalsare unstable.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “BLUEBACK”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the BLUE BACK function, select“OFF”.• To view a broadcast even when the recep-

tion signal is poor, set the BLUE BACK func-tion to “OFF”.

• Even when the BLUE BACK function is setto “OFF”, the sound may not be audible.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM12

Black

Page 107: AV-29LS

13

Using the TV’s menus

Picture AdjustmentsYou can adjust the picture as you like.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 4” menu.

MENU 4TINTCOLOURBRIGHTCONT.SHARP

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU T to select an itemand press MENU M to adjust it.

TINT* - : Reddish + : GreenishCOLOUR - : Lighter + : DeeperBRIGHT - : Darker + : BrighterCONT. - : Lower + : HigherSHARP - : Softer + : Sharper

* TINT (tint) is displayed only when viewingimages from NTSC3.58 or NTSC4.43 coloursystems.

Sound AdjustmentsYou can adjust the sound as you like.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU T to select an itemand press MENU M to adjust it.

TREBLE - : Weaker + : StrongerBASS - : Weaker + : StrongerBALANCE - : Left + : Right

VIDEO-2 SETSet the VIDEO-2 SET correctly according tothe video signal input from the externaldevice connected to the VIDEO-2 terminal.If this setting is incorrect, images will notbe displayed.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select“VIDEO-2 SET”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Set the VIDEO-2 SET according tothe video signal input from theVIDEO-2 terminal.

If a normal video signal (compositevideo signal) is input:Press the MENU m buttons to select“VIDEO”.

If a component video signal (Y/CB/CR

signals) is input:Press the MENU m buttons to select“COMPONENT”.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM13

Black

Page 108: AV-29LS

14

Using the TV’s menus

AI VOLUMEYou can prevent the sudden increase ordecrease of volume that occurs whenchanging channels or switching VIDEOmodes.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu, then select“AI VOLUME”.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the AI VOLUME function, select“OFF”.

• The AI VOLUME function may not operate asexpected if the sound input level from a broad-cast station (or video software) is extremely low.

• The AI VOLUME function for TV mode andVIDEO mode can be set separately. For example,you can set it to be off in TV mode and on inVIDEO mode. If you set the AI VOLUME func-tion while viewing a TV channel, the setting isregistered as the setting for TV mode. If you setthe AI VOLUME function while viewing imagesfrom a VIDEO terminal, the setting is registeredas the setting for VIDEO mode.

AUTO CH PRESETYou can automatically preset all TV channelsthat can be received by your TV to channels.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select “AUTOCH PRESET”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to start the AUTOCH PRESET function.

“>>>ON SEARCH” is displayed on thescreen.When all the TV channels that can bereceived on your TV have been preset,the display goes out and the AUTO CHPRESET function operation is completed.

To stop the AUTO CH PRESET:Press the MENU m button.

• The AUTO CH PRESET function does not preseta TV channel to the AV channel (channel num-ber 0).

• If the TV cannot preset the TV channel you wantto view, preset it manually. For details, see“MANUAL CH PRESET” on page 15.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM14

Black

Page 109: AV-29LS

15

Using the TV’s menus

MANUAL CH PRESETYou can manually preset desired TVchannels to desired channels.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“MANUAL CH PRESET”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M.

The sub-menu is displayed.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYSEARCH BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

• The channel number is displayed as a PRnumber. For example, channel 1 will be dis-played as PR 1. However, the AV channelwill be displayed as AV.

3 Press MENU M to select thechannel number.

4 Press VOLUME M to start search-ing for the TV channel.

“>>>” or “<<<” is displayed on thescreen.When the TV finds a TV channel, the“>>>” or “<<<” display goes out, andthe TV channel is preset to the currentlyselected channel number.• If the TV channel you want to preset is not

displayed, repeat step 4 until the TV findsthe TV channel you want to preset.

• To stop the MANUAL CH PRESET function,press any button other than the VOLUMEm button.

If the picture is not clear:Fine-tune the TV channel.

1 Press MENU t to select “FINE”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYFINE BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Hold VOLUME m down to fine-tunethe TV channel so that the best imageis displayed on screen.

“>” or “<” indicates that the TV is fine-tuning the TV channel.

If the sound is not clear:

1 Press MENU t to select “SOUNDSYSTEM”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYCHANGE BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Press VOLUME m to select theappropriate sound system.

• For the sound systems in each countryor region, refer to the table “Broadcastingsystems” on page 20.

5 Press MENU T to select“MANUAL”.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want topreset another TV channel to achannel.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM15

Black

Page 110: AV-29LS

16

Using the TV’s menus

SKIPYou can set undesired channels to beskipped. Channels set to be skipped cannotbe selected by the CHANNEL m buttonsnor the CHANNEL SCAN button.• Channels to which TV channels have not been

preset are automatically set to be skipped.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“MANUAL CH PRESET”.

2 Press MENU M.

The sub-menu is displayed.

3 Press MENU T to select “SKIP”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYYES/NO BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

4 Press MENU M to select thechannel you want to skip.

5 Press VOLUME M to select “YES”.

The channel is set to be skipped.To cancel the SKIP function, select “NO”.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 if you want toset another channel to skip.

LANGUAGEYou can select the language for the on-screendisplay.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“LANGUAGE”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to selectlanguage.

The on-screen display indications are inthe selected language.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM16

Black

Page 111: AV-29LS

17

TV buttons and parts

Front

<AV-29LH and AV-34LH>

<AV-21LH and AV-25LH>

Rear

1 Headphone jack2 VIDEO-3 terminal3 MENU button4 CHANNEL m buttons

1 VIDEO-1 INPUT terminal2 COMPONENT (VIDEO-2)

INPUT terminal3 OUTPUT terminal4 Aerial socket

4321

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

R RRCR

7 8

321 64 5

L/MONOV R

IN (VIDEO-3)

5 VOLUME m buttons6 TV/VIDEO button7 POWER lamp8 Main power button

1 2 3 4 5

7 8

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM17

Black

Page 112: AV-29LS

18

Using the buttons on the TV

Basic operation• Check to make sure the CHILD LOCK function

is set to “OFF”. When the CHILD LOCK functionis set to “ON”, the TV cannot be operated usingthe front control buttons. For details, see “CHILDLOCK” on page 12.

1 Press CHANNEL M to turn the TVon from standby mode.

2 Press CHANNEL M to select achannel.

3 Press VOLUME M to adjust thevolume.

4 To turn your TV off, press the Mainpower button to turn off the TV’smain power.

To change the TV mode to the VIDEOmode:•Press the TV/VIDEO button if the TV has

one. See page 6.• If the TV has no TV/VIDEO button,

select the VIDEO mode with the INPUTfunction in “MENU 1”.

Operating menus

You can operate functions in menus usingthe front control buttons on the TV.

1 Press MENU y to display a menu.

2 Press MENU y repeatedly to displaythe menu you want to use.

3 Press MENU y to select the desiredfunction or item.

4 Press MENU M or VOLUME M tocarry out the desired operation.

For details, see the description for eachfunction.

5 Press VOLUME M to turn the menudisplay off.

To turn the sub-menu display off:

1 Press MENU y to select “EXIT”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYEXIT BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Press VOLUME m to turn the displayoff.

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM18

Black

Page 113: AV-29LS

19

Troubleshooting

If there is no picture or the TV does not operate normally, make sure the problem isn’t due tothe reasons indicated below.If the problem persists even after taking the measures indicated, please contact a servicetechnician.

Cannot turn the TV on

• Press the Main power button on the TV.• Connect the power cord to the AC outlet.

The screen turns blue

• Is the BLUE BLACK function on? (see page 12.)

Remote control inoperable

• Replace the batteries. (see page 2.)

Buttons on front of the TV do not work

• Switch the CHILD LOCK function off. (see page12.)

TV does not respond immediately

• Press the main power button on the TV to turnoff the main power. Press the main power but-ton again to turn on the TV. If the TV returns toa normal state, operation is normal.

The TV turns off suddenly

• Is the OFF TIMER function set to operate? (seepage 8.)

• Is the AUTO SHUTOFF function on? (see page12.)

Poor sound

• Press the SOUND SYSTEM button to select an-other sound system. (see page 7.)

• Adjust the sound settings. (see page 13.)• If there is noise during mono sound output,

press the button to select “MONO”.(see page 8.)

Poor picture

• Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button to select an-other colour system. (see page 7.)

• Adjust the picture settings. (see page 13.)

• Is a component signal output device, such as aDVD player, connected correctly? (see page 4.)

• Is the “VIDEO-2 SET” function setting correct?(see page 13.)

• If noise (snow) totally blocks out the picture,check the following.- Have the TV and aerial been connected properly?

- Has the aerial cable been damaged?

- Is the aerial pointing in the right direction?

- Is the aerial itself faulty?• If the TV or aerial suffer interference from other

equipment, stripes or noise may appear in thepicture. Move any equipment which can causeinterference away from the TV.

• If the TV or aerial suffer interference fromsignals reflecting from mountains or buildings,double-pictures (ghosting) will occur. Changethe aerial’s direction or replace it with an aerialwith better directionality.

• When a white and bright still image (such as awhite dress) is displayed on the screen, thewhite part may look as if it is coloured. Whenthe image disappears from the screen, theunnatural colours will also disappear.

The picture is tilted

< AV-29LH and AV-34LH only >

• A picture may be tilted due to the influence ofthe earth’s magnetism. In this case, use the PIC-TURE TILT function to adjust the tilt. (see page11.)

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM19

Black

Page 114: AV-29LS

20

Specifications

TV RF systemsB, G, I, D, K, K1, M

Colour systemsPAL, SECAM, NTSC 3.58 MHz, NTSC 4.43 MHz

Channel and frequenciesVHF low channel (VL), VHF high channel (VH), UHF channel (U)Receives cable channels in mid band, super band and hyper band.

External input / outputVIDEO-1: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R inputVIDEO-2/COMPONENT: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R input,

COMPONENT VIDEO (Y/CB/CR) inputVIDEO-3: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R inputOUTPUT: VIDEO output , AUDIO L/R outputHeadphone jack: stereo mini jack (3.5 mm diameter)

Sound-multiplex systemsA2 or NICAM (B/G, I, DK)

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

Broadcasting systems

Area Country or RegionSystem

Colour SoundBahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc. PAL B/GIndonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Thailand,India, etc.

China, Vietnam, etc. PAL D/K

Hong Kong, etc. PAL I

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon, Saudi Arabia, etc. SECAM B/G

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc. NTSC M

Russia, etc. SECAM D/K

EuropeCzech Republic, Poland, etc. PAL D/K

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc. PAL B/G

UK, etc. PAL I

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc. PAL B/G

Republic of South Africa, etc. PAL I

Africa Nigeria, etc. PAL B/G

Egypt, Morocco, etc. SECAM B/G

Asia,Middle

East

LCT1006-001A-H 01.5.11, 6:19 PM20

Black

Page 115: AV-29LS

LCT1007-001A-H0501-Ki-NV-JMT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

COLOUR TELEVISION

INSTRUCTIONSThank you for buying this JVCcolour television.To make sure you understand how touse your new TV, please read thismanual thoroughly before you begin.

AV-2108TEEAV-2508TEEAV-2908TEEAV-3408TEE

Contents

Safety precautions 2Preparation 3

1 Insert the batteries into the remote control ... 32 Connecting the aerial and VCR .................. 43 Connecting other devices .......................... 54 Connect the power cord to the AC outlet ... 55 Initial setting ............................................... 6

Basic operation 7Remote control buttons and functions 8

ECO SENSOR button ..................................... 8PICTURE MODE button ................................. 8COLOUR SYSTEM button ............................. 8SOUND SYSTEM button ............................... 8MUTING button ............................................. 8DISPLAY button ............................................. 9OFF TIMER button ......................................... 9CHANNEL SCAN button ................................ 9RETURN + button .......................................... 9

Viewing teletext programmes 10,11Using the TV’s menus 12

Basic operation ............................................ 12INPUT ........................................................... 13PICTURE TILT ............................................... 13VNR ............................................................... 13COMPRESS (16:9) ........................................ 13AUTO SHUTOFF .......................................... 14CHILD LOCK ................................................. 14BLUE BACK .................................................. 14VIDEO-2 SET ................................................ 15Picture Adjustments .................................... 15Sound Adjustments ..................................... 15MONO SURROUND ..................................... 16AI VOLUME .................................................. 16AUTO CH PRESET ....................................... 16MANUAL CH PRESET .................................. 17SKIP .............................................................. 18LANGUAGE .................................................. 18

TV buttons and parts 19Using the buttons on the TV 20Troubleshooting 21Specifications 22

Cover 5/8/01, 11:56 PM1

Black

Page 116: AV-29LS

2

Safety precautions

WARNING• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the TV to rain or moisture.

CAUTION• Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.• Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When you unplug the TV, pull it

out by the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.• Never block or cover the cabinet openings

for ventilation. Never install the TV wheregood ventilation is unattainable. Wheninstalling this TV, leave spaces forventilation around the TV more than theminimum distances shown in the diagram.

• Do not allow objects or liquid into thecabinet openings.

• In the event of a fault, unplug the TV and call a service technician. Do not attempt torepair it by yourself or remove the rear cover.

• The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it whenhandling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled, wipe it with a soft dry cloth.Never rub it forcefully. Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.

• When you don’t use this TV for a long period of time, be sure to unplug it.

15 cm

10 cm 15 cm10 cm

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM2

Black

Page 117: AV-29LS

3

Preparation

1 Insert the batteries into the remote controlCorrectly insert two batteries, observing the , and . polarities and inserting the .end first.

CAUTION:Follow the cautions printed on the batteries.

Notes:•Use AA/R6/UM-3 dry cell batteries.• If the remote control does not work properly, fit new batteries.

The supplied batteries are for testing, not regular use.

RM-C355 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM3

Black

Page 118: AV-29LS

4

Preparation

2 Connecting the aerial and VCR• Read the manuals provided with the devices. Depending on the device, the connection method

may be different from the diagrams. Also the device settings may need to change depending onthe connection method.

• Turn off all the devices including the TV.• Connecting cables are not supplied.• When connecting monaural audio to the TV, use the L/MONO jack.• If you connect the VCR to the TV only with an aerial cable, you should preset the video channel

from the VCR to the AV channel (channel number 0) on this TV. See “MANUAL CH PRESET” onpage 17 and preset it manually.

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

R RRCR

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

V

R

MONOL/

VY/ V

R

L

R

MONOL/CB

CR

To RF output

To video output

VCR

VHF/UHF outdoor aerial

To aerial input 1

To audio output

2

3

VHF/UHF outdoor aerial

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

Connecting the aerial

Connecting the aerial and VCR

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM4

Black

Page 119: AV-29LS

5

Preparation

3 Connecting other devicesIf you are not connecting any other devices, skip step 3 and perform step 4.

• Use the headphones with a stereo mini jack (3.5 mm in diameter). When you connect theheadphones, the TV speakers go off.

• The OUTPUT terminal outputs the video and sound signals which you are viewing on the TV.You can dub them onto the VCR connected to the OUTPUT terminal.(The OUTPUT terminal cannot output teletext programmes or component video signals. Also itcannot output any signals when the TV is turned off.)

• Connect components outputting a component signal (Y/CB/CR signal), such as a DVD player, tothe VIDEO-2 terminal, and set VIDEO-2 SET function to “COMPONENT”. (See page 15.)

• The following illustrations are for the AV-2908TEE. Your TV’s front and rear pannels may notlook exactly like the illustrations.

L/MONOV R

IN (VIDEO-3)

Headphones

Camcorder or TV game

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

R RR

V V V

L

VCR (for playing)

VCR (for recording)

DVD player(composite signals)

DVD player(component video signals)

RCR

VY/

MONOL/MONOL/ CB

4 Connect the power cord to the AC outlet

Front

Rear

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM5

Black

Page 120: AV-29LS

6

Preparation

5 Initial settingWhen the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial setting mode, and the JVC logo isdisplayed. Follow the instructions on the on-screen display to perform the initialsettings.

1 Press the Main power buttonon the TV.

The POWER lamp lights. After theJVC logo has been displayed, the TVautomatically switches to thelanguage setting mode.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

• The JVC logo does not appear if yourTV has been turned on once before. Inthis case, use the LANGUAGE and AUTOCH PRESET functions to perform the ini-tial settings. For details, see pages 16 and18.

2 Press the MENU M buttons to select language.

3 Press the MENU t buttons to select “AUTO CH PRESET”.

4 Press the MENU M buttons to start the AUTO CH PRESET function.

“>>>ON SEARCH” is displayed on the screen.

When all the TV channels that can be received on your TV have been preset, thedisplay goes out and the AUTO CH PRESET function operation is completed.

To stop the AUTO CH PRESET function, press the MENU m buttons.

• If a TV channel you want to view is not set to the channel, set it with the MANUAL CH PRESETfunction. For details, see page 17.

This completes initial setting.Now you’re ready to enjoy your JVC TV.

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

DISPLAYbutton

MENU t buttonsMENU m

buttons

POWER lamp Main power button

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM6

Black

Page 121: AV-29LS

7

Basic operation

RM-C355 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

SYSTEM COLOUR

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

SOUND MUTING

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

1 Press the POWER button to turnyour TV on.

• If your TV does not turn on, press the Mainpower button on the TV then press thePOWER button again.

• You can also turn on your TV by pressingany of the following buttons;

- the CHANNEL m button

- the Number buttons

- the TV/VIDEO button

2 Select a channel.

Press the CHANNEL m button.• Up/down selection cannot be selected for

channels to which the SKIP has been setto “YES”. See page 18.

Press the Number buttons to enterthe channel number.• If you want to enter a two-digit number,

press the -/-- button to select the two digitmode “--”, then enter the channel num-ber.

3 Press the VOLUME M button toadjust the sound.

4 To turn your TV off, press thePOWER button.

• We recommend that you press the Mainpower button on the TV to turn the mainpower off if you do not plan to use your TVfor a long time or if you wish to save energy.

If the picture is not clear:Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button toselect another colour system, see page 8.

If the sound is not clear:Press the SOUND SYSTEM button to selectanother sound system, see page 8.

Viewing Images from an ExternalDevice:Press the TV/VIDEO button to select theVIDEO mode.• You can also use the INPUT function to select

the VIDEO mode. For details, refer to page 13.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM7

Black

Page 122: AV-29LS

8

Remote control buttons and functions

ECO SENSOR buttonYou can adjust this TV so that the screenautomatically adjusts to the optimumcontrast according to the brightness of yourroom. This function reduces eye strain andthe power consumption of this TV.

Press this button to select the desiredmode.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR DISPLAY:The ECO SENSOR function switches on. Inthis mode, the clover mark indicating thebrightness of your room is displayed forseveral seconds each time the brightnesschanges. The number of clover marksdisplayed on screen increases as your roombecomes darker.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR:The ECO SENSOR function switches on.However, in this mode, the clover mark willnot be displayed.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR OFF:The ECO SENSOR function switches off.

PICTURE MODE buttonYou can select one of three pictureadjustment settings as you like.

Press this button to select a mode.

BRIGHT:Heightens contrast and sharpness.

STANDARD:Standardizes picture adjustments.

SOFT:Softens contrast and sharpness.• Pressing this button returns all the picture set-

tings in “MENU 4” to their default settings.

COLOUR SYSTEM buttonIf the picture is not clear or no colourappears, change the current colour systemto another colour system.

Press this button to select the coloursystem.

AUTO PAL SECAMNTSC3.58NTSC4.43

AUTO:Automatic colour system selection.

• For the colour systems in each country orregion, see the table“Broadcasting systems” onpage 22.

• If the picture is not normal in the AUTO mode,change the AUTO mode to another coloursystem.

SOUND SYSTEM buttonIf the sound is not clear even when thepicture appears normal, change thecurrent sound system to another soundsystem.

Press this button to select the soundsystem.

B/G I D/K M

• For the sound systems in each country or re-gion, see the table “Broadcasting systems” onpage 22.

• You cannot select any sound system when in aVIDEO mode.

MUTING buttonYou can turn the sound off instantly.

Press this button.

To turn the sound on, press this buttonagain.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM8

Black

Page 123: AV-29LS

9

Remote control buttons and functions

RETURN + buttonYou can set a channel you frequently viewto the Return Channel and you can viewthat channel at any time with one-touch.

To set the channel to the ReturnChannel:

1 Select the channel you want to setto the Return Channel.

2 Press this button and hold until themessage “RETURN PLUSPROGRAMMED!” appears.

• When you turn off the TV, the Return Chan-nel setting is cancelled.

To view the Return Channel:Press this button.• You can view two channels (current channel

and Return Channel) alternately by pressing thisbutton.

To cancel the Return Channel setting:Press this button and hold until themessage“RETURN PLUS CANCELLED!”appears.

If no channel is set to the ReturnChannel:You can view the channel selected rightbefore the current channel by pressingthis button.

DISPLAY buttonYou can continuously display the currentchannel number or VIDEO mode on thescreen.

Press this button.

To turn the display off, press this buttonagain.

• When selecting a VIDEO mode with no signal,indication of the VIDEO mode becomes fixedon the screen.

OFF TIMER buttonYou can set the TV to automatically turn offafter a set time.

Press this button to select the period oftime.

• You can set the period of time to a maximum of120 minutes in 10 minute increments.

• 1 minute before the OFF TIMER function turnsoff the TV, “GOOD NIGHT!” appears.

To display the remaining time, press thisbutton once.

To cancel the OFF TIMER function, pressthis button to set the period of time to 0.

• The OFF TIMER function will not turn off theTV’s main power.

CHANNEL SCAN buttonYou can quickly view all TV channelsprogrammes that you can view on your TV,and search for the programme you want toview.

1 Press this button to start scanningTV channels.

The TV channel programmes are eachdisplayed for several seconds.• The programmes of TV channels for which

the SKIP function is set to “YES” are notdisplayed.

2 When you find the programme youwant to view, press this buttonagain to stop scanning.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM9

Black

Page 124: AV-29LS

10

Viewing teletext programmes

TEXT

REVEAL HOLD INDEX STORE

MODE SIZE SUBPAGE CANCEL

OFF TIMER

PICTURE MODE

CHANNEL SCAN

TV/TEXT ECO SENSOR

RETURN

4 5 6

7 8

0

9

-/--

TV/TEXT

REVEAL

HOLD

MODE

SIZE

STORE

Colouredbuttons

INDEX

CANCEL

SUBPAGE

Basic operation

1 Select a TV channel with a teletextprogramme.

2 Press the TV/TEXT button to changethe TV mode to the teletext mode.

The mode cycles as follows.

TV mode TEXT mode (TEXT only)MIX mode (TV and TEXT)

3 Select a teletext page by pressingthe CHANNEL M button,Number buttons or colouredbuttons.

To return to the TV mode, press the TV/VIDEO button or the TV/TEXT button.• If you have trouble receiving teletext broad-

casts, consult your local dealer or the tele-text station.

Using the List ModeYou can store the numbers of your favouriteteletext pages in the List mode and call themup quickly using the coloured buttons.

To store the page numbers:

1 Press the MODE button to engagethe List mode.

The stored page numbers are displayedat the bottom of the screen.

2 Press a coloured button to select aposition. Then press the Numberbuttons to enter the page number.

3 Press and hold down the STOREbutton.

The four page numbers blink white toindicate that they are stored in memory.

To call up a stored page:

1 Press the MODE button to engagethe List mode.

2 Press a coloured button to which apage has been assigned.

To exit the List mode, press the MODEbutton again.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM10

Black

Page 125: AV-29LS

11

Viewing teletext programmes

REVEALSome teletext pages include hidden text(such as answers to a quiz).You can display the hidden text.

Each time you press the REVEAL button,text is hidden or revealed.

HOLDYou can hold a teletext page on the screenfor as long as you want, even while severalother teletext pages are being received.

Press the HOLD button.

To cancel the HOLD function, press theHOLD button again.

CANCELYou can watch a TV programme even whenin the teletext mode.

1 Press the Number button to enter apage number, or press a colouredbutton.

The TV starts searching for a teletextpage.

2 Press the CANCEL button.

The TV programme appears.

When the TV finds the teletext page, itspage number appears in the upper left ofthe screen.

3 Press the CANCEL button to viewthe teletext page.

• Pressing the CANCEL button cannot changethe teletext mode to the TV mode.

INDEXYou can return to the index page instantly.

Press the INDEX button.

In the List mode:Returns to the page number displayed inthe lower left area of the screen.

SUBPAGESome teletext pages include sub-pages thatare automatically displayed.You can hold any sub-page, or view it atany time.

1 Press the SUBPAGE button tooperate the Sub-page function.

2 Press the Number buttons to enter asub-page number.

Example:3rd sub-page press 0, 0, 0 and 3.• You can also select a sub-page by pressing

the red or green button.

To cancel the Sub-page function, press theSUBPAGE button again.

SIZEYou can double the height of the teletextdisplay.

Press the SIZE button.

The teletext display changes cyclically.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM11

Black

Page 126: AV-29LS

12

DISPLAY

MENU

POWER

CHANNEL VOLUME

DISPLAYbutton

MENU t buttonsMENU m

buttons

Basic operation

1 Press the MENU T buttons.One of the 5 menus is displayed.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Repeatedly press the MENU Tbuttons to display a desiredmenu.

• If you hold down the y button, the nextmenu is displayed.

• If the selected function is on the first line,pressing the r button displays the preced-ing menu.

3 Repeatedly press the MENU Tbuttons to select a desiredfunction.

Using the TV’s menus

This TV has a number of functions you can operate using the menus. To use all your TV’sfunctions fully, you need to understand how to use the menus.

4 Press the MENU M buttons tochange function settings.

Example:

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF OFF CHILD LOCK OFF BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

⇔ MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK OFF BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

• With some functions, the operation methodmay differ.

5 Press the DISPLAY button to turnthe display off.

•To operate a menu using the buttons onthe front panel of the TV, refer to“Operating menus” on page 20.

Changes the AUTOSHUTOFF setting.

MENU number

The icon on theleft indicates thecurrently selectedfunction.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM12

Black

Page 127: AV-29LS

13

Using the TV’s menus

VNRYou can reduce picture noise.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“VNR”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the VNR function, select “OFF”.

COMPRESS (16:9)This function converts a normal picture (4:3aspect ratio) into a wide picture (16:9 aspectratio).Use for pictures with a 16:9 aspect ratio thathave been squeezed into a normal picture(4:3 aspect ratio), to restore their originaldimensions.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“COMPRESS (16:9)”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the COMPRESS (16:9) function,select “OFF”.

INPUTYou can view images from VCRs or otherdevices connected to your TV.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“INPUT”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “VIDEO 1”,“VIDEO 2” or “VIDEO 3”.

TV mode changes to VIDEO mode.

PICTURE TILT< AV-2908TEE and AV-3408TEE only >

There are cases where the Earth’s magneticforce may make the picture tilt. If thishappens, you can correct the picture tilt.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 1” menu, then select“PICTURE TILT”.

MENU 1 INPUT TV VNR ON COMPRESS(16:9) ON PICTURE TILT 00

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Continue pressing MENU M untilthe picture becomes level.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM13

Black

Page 128: AV-29LS

14

Using the TV’s menus

AUTO SHUTOFFYou can set your TV to turn off if no signalsare received for about 15 minutes or longerafter the end of a broadcast.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “AUTOSHUTOFF”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the AUTO SHUTOFF function,select “OFF”.• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not turn

off the TV’s main power.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for aVIDEO mode.

CHILD LOCKYou can disable the front control buttons ofthe TV.When this function is set to “ON”, the TVcan be operated using only the remotecontrol.Use this function to prevent children fromoperating the TV without parental consent.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “CHILDLOCK”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the CHILD LOCK function,select “OFF”.

• The CHILD LOCK function is canceled whenyou turn the TV’s main power off.

BLUE BACKYou can mute the sound and change thepicture into a blue screen while no signalsare received by the TV, or when the signalsare unstable.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select “BLUEBACK”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the BLUE BACK function, select“OFF”.• To view a broadcast even when the recep-

tion signal is poor, set the BLUE BACK func-tion to “OFF”.

• Even when the BLUE BACK function is setto “OFF”, the sound may not be audible.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM14

Black

Page 129: AV-29LS

15

Using the TV’s menus

VIDEO-2 SETSet the VIDEO-2 SET correctly according tothe video signal input from the externaldevice connected to the VIDEO-2 terminal.If this setting is incorrect, images will notbe displayed.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 2” menu, then select“VIDEO-2 SET”.

MENU 2 AUTO SHUTOFF ON CHILD LOCK ON BLUE BACK ON VIDEO-2 SET COMPONENT SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Set the VIDEO-2 SET according tothe video signal input from theVIDEO-2 terminal.

If a normal video signal (compositevideo signal) is input:Press the MENU m buttons to select“VIDEO”.

If a component video signal (Y/CB/CR

signals) is input:Press the MENU m buttons to select“COMPONENT”.

Picture AdjustmentsYou can adjust the picture as you like.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 4” menu.

MENU 4TINTCOLOURBRIGHTCONT.SHARP

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU T to select an itemand press MENU M to adjust it.

TINT* - : Reddish + : GreenishCOLOUR - : Lighter + : DeeperBRIGHT - : Darker + : BrighterCONT. - : Lower + : HigherSHARP - : Softer + : Sharper

* TINT (tint) is displayed only when viewingimages from NTSC3.58 or NTSC4.43 coloursystems.

Sound AdjustmentsYou can adjust the sound as you like.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON MONO SURROUND ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU T to select an itemand press MENU M to adjust it.

TREBLE - : Weaker + : StrongerBASS - : Weaker + : StrongerBALANCE - : Left + : Right

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM15

Black

Page 130: AV-29LS

16

Using the TV’s menus

MONO SURROUNDYou can enjoy normal monaural sound moreby converting it into a stereo-like sound.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu, then select“MONO SURROUND”.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON MONO SURROUND ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the MONO SURROUNDfunction, select “OFF”.

AI VOLUMEYou can prevent the sudden increase ordecrease of volume that occurs whenchanging channels or switching VIDEOmodes.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 5” menu, then select“AI VOLUME”.

MENU 5BASSTREBLEBALANCE AI VOLUME ON MONO SURROUND ON

SELECT BY EXIT BYOPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to select “ON”.

To cancel the AI VOLUME function, select“OFF”.

• The AI VOLUME function may not operate asexpected if the sound input level from a broad-cast station (or video software) is extremely low.

• The AI VOLUME function for TV mode andVIDEO mode can be set separately. For example,you can set it to be off in TV mode and on inVIDEO mode. If you set the AI VOLUME func-tion while viewing a TV channel, the setting isregistered as the setting for TV mode. If you setthe AI VOLUME function while viewing imagesfrom a VIDEO terminal, the setting is registeredas the setting for VIDEO mode.

AUTO CH PRESETYou can automatically preset all TV channelsthat can be received by your TV to channels.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select “AUTOCH PRESET”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to start the AUTOCH PRESET function.

“>>>ON SEARCH” is displayed on thescreen.When all the TV channels that can bereceived on your TV have been preset,the display goes out and the AUTO CHPRESET function operation is completed.

To stop the AUTO CH PRESET:Press the MENU m button.

• The AUTO CH PRESET function does not preseta TV channel to the AV channel (channel num-ber 0).

• If the TV cannot preset the TV channel you wantto view, preset it manually. For details, see“MANUAL CH PRESET” on page 17.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM16

Black

Page 131: AV-29LS

17

Using the TV’s menus

MANUAL CH PRESETYou can manually preset desired TVchannels to desired channels.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“MANUAL CH PRESET”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M.

The sub-menu is displayed.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYSEARCH BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

• The channel number is displayed as a PRnumber. For example, channel 1 will be dis-played as PR 1. However, the AV channelwill be displayed as AV.

3 Press MENU M to select thechannel number.

4 Press VOLUME M to start search-ing for the TV channel.

“>>>” or “<<<” is displayed on thescreen.When the TV finds a TV channel, the“>>>” or “<<<” display goes out, andthe TV channel is preset to the currentlyselected channel number.• If the TV channel you want to preset is not

displayed, repeat step 4 until the TV findsthe TV channel you want to preset.

• To stop the MANUAL CH PRESET function,press any button other than the VOLUMEm button.

If the picture is not clear:Fine-tune the TV channel.

1 Press MENU t to select “FINE”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYFINE BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Hold VOLUME m down to fine-tunethe TV channel so that the best imageis displayed on screen.

“>” or “<” indicates that the TV is fine-tuning the TV channel.

If the sound is not clear:

1 Press MENU t to select “SOUNDSYSTEM”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYCHANGE BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Press VOLUME m to select theappropriate sound system.

• For the sound systems in each countryor region, refer to the table “Broadcastingsystems” on page 22.

5 Press MENU T to select“MANUAL”.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want topreset another TV channel to achannel.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM17

Black

Page 132: AV-29LS

18

Using the TV’s menus

SKIPYou can set undesired channels to beskipped. Channels set to be skipped cannotbe selected by the CHANNEL m buttonsnor the CHANNEL SCAN button.• Channels to which TV channels have not been

preset are automatically set to be skipped.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“MANUAL CH PRESET”.

2 Press MENU M.

The sub-menu is displayed.

3 Press MENU T to select “SKIP”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYYES/NO BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

4 Press MENU M to select thechannel you want to skip.

5 Press VOLUME M to select “YES”.

The channel is set to be skipped.To cancel the SKIP function, select “NO”.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 if you want toset another channel to skip.

LANGUAGEYou can select the language for the on-screendisplay.

1 Press MENU T to display the“MENU 3” menu, then select“LANGUAGE”.

MENU 3 AUTO CH PRESET MANUAL CH PRESET LANGUAGE ENGLISH

SELECT BY EXIT BY OPERATE BY -+ DISPLAY

2 Press MENU M to selectlanguage.

The on-screen display indications are inthe selected language.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM18

Black

Page 133: AV-29LS

19

TV buttons and parts

Front

<AV-2908TEE and AV-3408TEE>

<AV-2108TEE and AV-2508TEE>

Rear

5 VOLUME m buttons6 TV/VIDEO button7 POWER lamp8 Main POWER button

7 8

321 64 5

L/MONOV R

IN (VIDEO-3)

1 VIDEO-1 INPUT terminal2 COMPONENT (VIDEO-2)

INPUT terminal3 OUTPUT terminal4 Aerial socket

4321

VIDEO-1

INPUTOUTPUT

COMPONENT(VIDEO-2)

INPUT

V

MONOL/

VY/ V

LMONOL/CB

R RRCR

1 Headphone jack2 VIDEO-3 terminal3 MENU button4 CHANNEL m buttons

1 2 3 4 5

7 8

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM19

Black

Page 134: AV-29LS

20

Using the buttons on the TV

Basic operation• Check to make sure the CHILD LOCK function

is set to “OFF”. When the CHILD LOCK functionis set to “ON”, the TV cannot be operated usingthe front control buttons. For details, see “CHILDLOCK” on page 14.

1 Press CHANNEL M to turn the TVon from standby mode.

2 Press CHANNEL M to select achannel.

3 Press VOLUME M to adjust thevolume.

4 To turn your TV off, press the Mainpower button to turn off the TV’smain power.

To change the TV mode to the VIDEOmode:•Press the TV/VIDEO button if the TV has

one. See page 7.• If the TV has no TV/VIDEO button,

select the VIDEO mode with the INPUTfunction in “MENU 1”.

Operating menus

You can operate functions in menus usingthe front control buttons on the TV.

1 Press MENU y to display a menu.

2 Press MENU y repeatedly to displaythe menu you want to use.

3 Press MENU y to select the desiredfunction or item.

4 Press MENU M or VOLUME M tocarry out the desired operation.

For details, see the description for eachfunction.

5 Press VOLUME M to turn the menudisplay off.

To turn the sub-menu display off:

1 Press MENU y to select “EXIT”.

MANUAL FINE SKIP NO SOUND SYSTEM B/G EXIT

SELECT BY PR 1 VLPROGRAM BY -+ EXIT BYEXIT BY VOL-+ DISPLAY

2 Press VOLUME m to turn the displayoff.

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM20

Black

Page 135: AV-29LS

21

Troubleshooting

If there is no picture or the TV does not operate normally, make sure the problem isn’t due tothe reasons indicated below.If the problem persists even after taking the measures indicated, please contact a servicetechnician.

Poor picture

• Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button to select an-other colour system. (see page 8.)

• Adjust the picture settings. (see page 15.)

• Is a component signal output device, such as aDVD player, connected correctly? (see page 5.)

• Is the “VIDEO-2 SET” function setting correct?(see page 15.)

• If noise (snow) totally blocks out the picture,check the following.- Have the TV and aerial been connected properly?

- Has the aerial cable been damaged?

- Is the aerial pointing in the right direction?

- Is the aerial itself faulty?• If the TV or aerial suffer interference from other

equipment, stripes or noise may appear in thepicture. Move any equipment which can causeinterference away from the TV.

• If the TV or aerial suffer interference fromsignals reflecting from mountains or buildings,double-pictures (ghosting) will occur. Changethe aerial’s direction or replace it with an aerialwith better directionality.

• When a white and bright still image (such as awhite dress) is displayed on the screen, thewhite part may look as if it is coloured. Whenthe image disappears from the screen, theunnatural colours will also disappear.

The picture is tilted

< AV-2908TEE and AV-3408TEE only >

• A picture may be tilted due to the influence ofthe earth’s magnetism. In this case, use the PIC-TURE TILT function to adjust the tilt. (see page13.)

Cannot turn the TV on

• Press the Main power button on the TV.• Connect the power cord to the AC outlet.

The screen turns blue

• Is the BLUE BLACK function on? (see page 14.)

Remote control inoperable

• Replace the batteries. (see page 3.)

Buttons on front of the TV do not work

• Switch the CHILD LOCK function off. (see page14.)

TV does not respond immediately

• Press the main power button on the TV to turnoff the main power. Press the main power buttonagain to turn on the TV. If the TV returns to anormal state, operation is normal.

The TV turns off suddenly

• Is the OFF TIMER function set to operate? (seepage 9.)

• Is the AUTO SHUTOFF function on? (see page14.)

Poor sound

• Press the SOUND SYSTEM button to select an-other sound system. (see page 8.)

• Adjust the sound settings. (see page 15.)

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM21

Black

Page 136: AV-29LS

22

Specifications

TV RF systemsB, G, I, D, K, K1, M

Colour systemsPAL, SECAM, NTSC 3.58 MHz, NTSC 4.43 MHz

Channel and frequenciesVHF low channel (VL), VHF high channel (VH), UHF channel (U)Receives cable channels in mid band, super band and hyper band.

External input / outputVIDEO-1: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R inputVIDEO-2/COMPONENT: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R input,

COMPONENT VIDEO (Y/CB/CR) inputVIDEO-3: VIDEO input, AUDIO L/R inputOUTPUT: VIDEO output , AUDIO L/R outputHeadphone jack: stereo mini jack (3.5 mm diameter)

Teletext systemFLOF (Fastext), WST (World Standard Text)

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

Broadcasting systems

Area Country or RegionSystem

Colour SoundBahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc. PAL B/GIndonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, Thailand,India, etc.

East China, Vietnam, etc. PAL D/K

Hong Kong, etc. PAL I

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon, Saudi Arabia, etc. SECAM B/G

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc. NTSC M

Russia, etc. SECAM D/K

EuropeCzech Republic, Poland, etc. PAL D/K

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc. PAL B/G

UK, etc. PAL I

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc. PAL B/G

Republic of South Africa, etc. PAL I

Africa Nigeria, etc. PAL B/G

Egypt, Morocco, etc. SECAM B/G

Asia,Middle

LCT1007-001A-H 5/8/01, 11:00 PM22

Black